JP6653682B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is fired by a launching device into a game area, and a game medium wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, and an execution condition (start condition) is satisfied, A pachinko game in which a variety of identification information (hereinafter referred to as "display symbols") is variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is given is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the game machine enters an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has entered the jackpot gaming state has a special winning combination or a special electric auditorium called an attacker in an open state, and the gaming state is extremely easy to win a game ball to give a predetermined game value to a player. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of effects are performed to make the player expect the display result to be in a specific display mode.

  As such a gaming machine, after displaying a plurality of images as the specific display, an effect that the display mode of the specific display is changed by combining the plurality of images and that the display mode of the specific display is changed (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-160056 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, if information about the game is not notified during a predetermined period after the player recognizes that the display mode of the specific display is to be changed, the game situation cannot be grasped, and There was a risk that the interest would be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing a specific display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) which can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed;
Abnormality notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing an error notification process shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification);
A corresponding display means for performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing an active display);
Corresponding display changing means (CPU 120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect) for changing a display mode of the corresponding display,
The abnormality notification execution means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification (for example, when the stop flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 60B and 62)
The specific display means, stepwise increase or decrease the meter display of the display mode as the specific display when said specific display of the display mode is changed has passed a predetermined time period after the notification,
The special notification executing unit, it said that certain display of the display mode is changed being capable of performing the special notification also at a predetermined period thereafter, which is broadcast (e.g. notification that the icon of the specific display is displayed Abnormal notification is possible even within a predetermined period after the request has been made),
The ratio is controlled to the advantageous state in accordance with a combination of the corresponding display of the display mode the meter display of the display mode is characterized in that that Do different.

According to such a configuration, the game situation can be grasped even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the specific display is notified to be changed, and a decrease in gaming interest can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced. Further, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by the corresponding display and the specific display.

(2) Further, in order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to a player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing a specific display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means capable of changing the execution mode of the predetermined effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52);
Abnormality notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing an error notification process shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification);
A corresponding display means for performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing an active display);
Corresponding display changing means (CPU 120 for effect control for performing an active display change effect) for changing a display mode of the corresponding display,
The abnormality notification execution unit can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification (for example, when the suppression flag is turned on). Yes (for example, see FIGS. 22B and 24),
The specific display means, stepwise increase or decrease the meter display of the display mode as the specific display when said specific display of the display mode is changed has passed a predetermined time period after the notification,
The special notification executing unit, it said that certain display of the display mode is changed being capable of performing the special notification also at a predetermined period thereafter, which is broadcast (e.g. notification that the icon of the specific display is displayed Abnormal notification is possible even within a predetermined period after the request has been made),
The ratio is controlled to the advantageous state in accordance with a combination of the corresponding display of the display mode the meter display of the display mode is characterized in that that Do different.

According to such a configuration, the game situation can be grasped even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the specific display is notified to be changed, and a decrease in gaming interest can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced. Further, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by the corresponding display and the specific display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
Special effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a pseudo continuous fanning effect) capable of executing a special effect for performing either a successful effect or a failed effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The specific display means is capable of changing a display mode of the specific display when an effect result of the predetermined effect is a specific result (for example, displaying an icon as a specific display when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success). Such),
The special effect execution means is configured to execute the successful effect at a high rate during a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is indicated as the specific result to when the display mode of the specific display changes. Execute a special effect (for example, determine a timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display stepwise by displaying different types of special images stepwise (for example, when a plurality of specific display effects are performed, the specific display is displayed stepwise). More icons),
In accordance with the combination of the displayed special images, one of a plurality of effects having different ratios controlled to the advantageous state is executed at a different ratio (for example, an icon to be displayed (a combination of icons) is variably displayed. Depending on the result)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which special image is displayed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (3) or (4),
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio of the effect result of the predetermined effect to the specific result differs depending on which timing the start timing of the predetermined effect is (for example, according to the execution timing of the predetermined effect). The result of the given effect is different, indicating a success rate)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect can be attracted.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to ( 5 ),
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect notifying the advantage (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a reach effect of super reach);
Special change effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a special change effect) capable of executing a special change effect for changing a display mode of the specific display when the specific effect is executed. In addition,
The special change effect execution means is capable of executing the special change effect in a mode prior to the specific effect (for example, performing a special change effect by interrupting a super reach effect).
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the mode of the specific display can be changed in a mode that has priority over the specific effect, so that even when the specific effect is executed, the change in the mode of the specific display can be noticed.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
A plurality of selection candidates are presented, and selection means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a race effect as a predetermined effect) capable of selecting any of the presented plurality of selection candidates is provided.
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate having a higher degree of advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the degree of success expectation as a result of the production of the predetermined production is compared. And a selection candidate belonging to a first group that is relatively low, and a selection candidate belonging to a second group that has a relatively high degree of expectation of success as an effect of the predetermined effect.
The selecting means may include, when the first selection candidates are not included in the plurality of presented selection candidates, any of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate than when the first plurality of selection candidates is included in the presented plurality of selection candidates. Not selected (for example, the second suspension rate is set higher than the first suspension rate)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8),
The special notification execution means is capable of executing an abnormality display as the special notification based on the abnormality determination being performed, and performs the predetermined notification for a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed. The abnormality display can be started even when the abnormality determination is performed (for example, the abnormality notification can be performed even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed).
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, an error display can be suitably performed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of obtained balls as the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the specific display is notified (for example, when an icon as the specific display is displayed). It is possible to update the number of acquired balls even within a predetermined period after being notified that the item is displayed),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the notification of the acquired payout number.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the following inventions (11) to (19). Conventionally, as an example of a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a launching device, and a predetermined value is determined based on a game medium winning in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area. There is a pachinko gaming machine which can provide a game value of. Further, as another example of a gaming machine, a player operates a start lever after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium such as a medal, a coin, or a game ball similar to a pachinko gaming machine. There is a slot machine which starts variable display of a display symbol by a variable display device and can give a predetermined game value based on a derived display result. As such a gaming machine, for example, a “gaming machine that reproduces a music selected by a player during a jackpot given as a predetermined game value” as disclosed in JP-A-2013-183860, JP-A-2012-45233 There is a “gaming machine that performs a winning effect in response to a gaming ball winning a big winning opening during a big hit”. However, in such a gaming machine, if a specific effect such as playing a song and a predetermined effect such as a winning effect can be executed during a big hit, the specific effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect. There is a possibility that the effect is hindered and the effect of the specific effect is reduced. In view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine capable of preventing a specific effect from being hindered by the execution of a predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

(11) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) which can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed;
Abnormality notification means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing error notification processing shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification),
The abnormality notification unit can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification (for example, when the stop flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 60B and 62)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

(12) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to still another aspect includes:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Specific effect executing means (eg, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, music) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) capable of changing the execution mode of the predetermined effect (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 53);
Abnormality notification means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing error notification processing shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification),
The abnormality notification unit can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification (for example, when the suppression flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 60 (B) and 62).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

(13) In the gaming machine of (11) or (12),
A predetermined operation of the player (for example, a pressing operation (simple pressing) on the push button 9031B) and a specific operation different from the predetermined operation (for example, an operation of continuously pulling the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds) can be detected. And
Based on the detection of the predetermined operation in the advantageous state, the effect mode in the advantageous state can be changed (for example, the image indicating the music title can be moved by the process of step S90628 illustrated in FIG. 54. FIG. 56 (B)),
The changing means can change the execution mode of the predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation in the advantageous state (for example, Yes in step S90401 shown in FIG. 52 and Yes in step S90412 shown in FIG. 52). Alternatively, when Yes in step S90421, the on / off state of the stop flag or the suppression flag can be switched.)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the execution of the predetermined effect can be changed by performing a specific operation different from the predetermined operation by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from changing the execution mode unintended, and to produce the effect. Can be prevented from decreasing.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13),
Even in the advantageous state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation (for example, a period from 5 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to when receiving the jackpot end designation command). When the lever pull operation by the player is started and the lever pull operation is continued within the time period, since the timing result in the timing processing of the lever pull operation does not exceed 5 seconds, the on / off state of the stop flag may be switched. Absent),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be suitably changed.

(15) In the gaming machine according to (13) or (14),
Based on the detection of the specific operation in the advantageous state, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, an effect of outputting a winning sound notifying that a game ball has won a large winning opening, an effect of remaining winning in a round game) (The effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings indicating the opening, the effect of outputting a special winning opening opening sound for notifying that the special winning opening has been opened, and the like) are changed.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (15),
During the detection of the specific operation (for example, a period from the start of the specific operation until 2 seconds or 5 seconds elapse), the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the execution mode of the predetermined effect after the change by the changing unit. (For example, see FIG. 63).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16),
When the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification, the ease of recognizing the abnormality notification changes (for example, as shown in FIG. When the notification sound is output and the stop flag is turned on by detecting the lever pulling 5 seconds, the remaining winning number display is ended as shown in FIG. Even if a winning in the winning opening occurs, the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, while the ball-off error display and the ball-off error notification sound are continuously performed),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform abnormality notification according to a change in the execution mode of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (17),
A music playing means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control that executes the processing of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of playing music in a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit game state),
The music reproduced in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 55 (C)),
At the time of music selection, the music reproduction means reproduces a specific part which is a part of the selected music and is different from the head of the music (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S90628 of FIG. 54). Such),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the time of music selection.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (18),
A display unit (for example, see FIG. 64) capable of displaying a control history (for example, a first control history or a second control history) for the advantageous state;
It is possible to detect a special operation of the player (for example, a pressing operation of the trigger button provided on the operation stick of the stick button controller 9031A by the player),
The display mode of the control history can be switched based on the detection of the special operation (for example, see FIG. 64).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the control history can be displayed in a display mode according to the preference of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a special figure display result decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a big hit type decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a fluctuation pattern decision table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific display effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the specific display effect execution determination table and the specific display effect execution mode determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart which shows the details of a specific display effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a specific display effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect execution setting process. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a notice effect when a specific display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case a specific display effect and a failure effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case a specific display effect and a successful effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case a specific display effect and a notice effect are performed. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rendering operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 25. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when an effect setting is performed by a player at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 25. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in the case of performing a race effect as a predetermined effect. When a specific display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first-stage display mode, and an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change in the meter display is executed. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It shows an example of an effect operation in a case where the super reach effect is executed alone. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement when a specific display effect and an active display change effect are performed when a super reach effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement when a specific display effect and an active display change effect are performed when a super reach effect is performed. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when an auto button function is set to be enabled or disabled. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by a long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sound volume state display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sound volume state display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific operation detection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the execution mode of a predetermined effect in the ON / OFF state of a stop flag and a suppression flag. It is a flow chart which shows an example of music composition during a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of music which can be reproduced during a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of composition of data which can be reproduced during a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a big hit production process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special winning opening winning a prize production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process at the time of opening a special winning opening. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of a big winning opening opening sound, a ball-drop error display, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of a volume change operation during a super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect, such as a big winning opening opening sound and a ball-drop error display. It is a figure which shows the example of effects, such as a big winning opening sound and a ball-off error display, in a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode change of a control history to a big hit game state in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (to the right of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and identifies each of them in a special figure game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information), is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. I do. Note that the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Instead, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which a combination of a 7-segment LED to be turned on and a light to be turned off may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A symbol number corresponding to each of a plurality of types of special symbols is given. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special map and the type of the second special map may be the same (for example, numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−”), or the type may be different. It may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The display area of the image display device 5 corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game. For example, in a decorative design display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, for example, three, a decorative design, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified, is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game, In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the change of the decorative pattern (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the fixed decoration symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display apparatus 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is identifiable, are variably displayed, and a determined decorative pattern which is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derived”). Deriving and displaying various display symbols, such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol, means stopping the identification information of the decorative symbol or the like (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation and display of the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes “0” and the decorative symbol becomes “0”. The design may be stopped and displayed, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not steadily displayed, the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the decorative symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include, for example, completely displaying the decorative symbol for a shorter time than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right" include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters). Numbers, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, any combination of numbers and characters or symbols and character images, etc., may be a character image, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image indicating an arbitrary figure). Each of the decorative symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers "1" to "8" are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8", respectively. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, but may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lossy combination can be configured.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, before the determined decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right." In the display, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from upper to lower, from small to large, and when the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, Thus, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a larger symbol number to a symbol with a smaller symbol number. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be subsequently displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of variable display holds (number of special figure hold storages) corresponding to the special figure game can be specified. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning prize ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B. This occurs based on a start winning prize due to (entering). That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not established, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is performed. Done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A and the upper part of the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B, together with the start winning prize storage display area 5 </ b> H, are used for the first reservation for displaying the number of special figure reservation storages in a identifiable manner. An indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided. The first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The second reservation display 25B displays the second special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display reserved storage number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is particularly referred to as a total reserved storage number. The term “number of special figure reserved storages” generally refers to a concept including any of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. (The concept includes the number of the first special figure reserved storages and the number of the second special figure reserved storages, but excludes the total number of reserved storages).

  Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning prize ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilt position, by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning port.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( Into the open state where it is easy to enter. Note that, even when the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B is in the normally open state, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, it is more likely that the gaming ball enters than in the enlarged opening state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured such that, in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an enlarged open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), and a normal open state in which the game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved storage number becomes a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If it is less than or equal to, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved storage number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second starting port switch 22B May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the special winning opening (enters). ) In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes between an open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. I do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment or dot-matrix LED or the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is variably displayed (variably displayed). Such a variable display of ordinary symbols is called an ordinary game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on detection of a game ball that has entered any of the general prize holes by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided around the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal prize ball device 6A, the normal variable prize ball device 6B, the special variable prize ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor provided in the hit ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (retains) excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side on the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the center portion of the lower plate). I have. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator's hand is hooked when the player grips the operation rod). I have. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised as follows. It is sufficient that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like is built in the operation stick.

  It is sufficient that a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in a lower portion of the stick controller 31A inside the main body of the lower plate. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmission-type photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation stick when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmission-type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged on the right side of the center position of the operation stick as viewed from the player side and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a photosensor.

  The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. It is sufficient that a push sensor that detects a player's operation performed on the push button 31B is provided inside the body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ordinary symbol display 20 performs variable display of the ordinary symbol such that the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general symbol starting condition is established, the general symbol display condition is established based on the general symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol such as the end of the previous ordinary symbol game. Is started.

  In the ordinary symbol game, after a variation of the ordinary symbol is started, when a predetermined time that is the ordinary symbol variation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol that is a variable display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the numeral indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variable display result of the symbol is “Loss”. Become. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, an enlarged opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is at the tilt position is performed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition has been satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit game state, or the like. The second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state.

  In the special figure game using the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol is performed when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time elapses. Derived special symbols (special figure display results) are derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the special display result becomes "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, a "small hit" is obtained as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, "losing" is obtained.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the number of “3”, “5”, and “7” is a large hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number of “2” is a small hit symbol. , A special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special figure games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is kept open in a period until a predetermined number of (for example, 10) winning balls are generated or a predetermined number of (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed.

  The special winning opening door, which has the special winning opening opened during the execution of the round, receives game balls falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special winning opening to form a special variable winning prize ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”). Note that, even before the number of round executions reaches the upper limit number, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the large winning opening). .

  Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" to be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" Is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. The door opens the large winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) as a first period elapses or a period in which a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. The normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the special jackpot game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set in each round. The upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening) is shorter than the first period in the normal open big hit state (for example, 0). .1 second). In the short open jackpot state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payouts (prize balls) are obtained if a game ball wins in the special winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (for example, 0.1 second) and is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which no payout (prize ball) can be obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as a second specific game state.

  In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the one in which the open period of the big winning opening is shorter than the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the maximum number of times (for example, two times) in which the special winning opening is opened is set. The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. In other words, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term open round specific game state is such that the period during which the gaming ball easily passes through (enters) the special winning opening in each round is changed from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also short, and the number of rounds executed is at least one of the second round number smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number "2" serving as the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled as the special game state. In the small hitting game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 in which the big winning opening is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is provided. In response to the start of any special figure game among the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation symbol”). ) Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuing, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. More specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (eg, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) When a decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating an alphanumeric character of "7") constituting a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) which has not been stopped and displayed yet. In the symbol display area 5C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state in which all or some of the combinations are changed synchronously.

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative symbol, or changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, a rendering operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as the change of the display mode of the character image or the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the change mode of the decorative pattern is called reach effect display (or simply, reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. In each reach mode, the possibility of "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the reach mode of the super-reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” (big hit expectation) is higher than when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the variable display result may be "big hit", etc. In some cases, a variable display effect for notifying a player is performed in a variable display mode of a decorative symbol or the like. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo ream” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effects of “slip” and “pseudo-sequence” in response to a change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side or the like. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is performed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decoration symbols are changed in all of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left,” “middle,” and “right,” and then a plurality of decoration symbol display areas (for example, After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (eg, “1” or “2”) of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol display areas is displayed. )) (For example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stop display after the decorative symbol is changed again. Then, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the variable display effect of “slip”, after a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the fixed decorative symbol as a variable display result, a predetermined number of symbols are displayed. By performing the variable display again on the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination without being in the reach state is stopped and displayed. is there.

  In the variable display effect of the “pseudo ream”, in response to one of the first and second start conditions of the special figure game being established once, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Until the final determined decorative symbol as a result is derived and displayed, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The effect display for changing (re-changing) the decorative symbol again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of times of the pseudo-run variation in this embodiment is “left”, “middle”, “right”, excluding the initial variation from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop of all decorative symbols for the first time. "Indicates the number of times the decorative symbol changes again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, for example, one of a plurality of predetermined types of pseudo ream chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is temporarily stopped as a predetermined display result, and thereafter, the variable display (re-variation) is performed again. The pseudo consecutive chances may include a decorative symbol combination that is a predetermined non-reach combination instead of the decorative symbol variable display mode being the reach mode. Further, the pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach-loss combination (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. For example, a decorative symbol (middle symbol) stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the pseudo consecutive chances is replaced with a special decorative symbol (pseudo consecutive chance symbol) which is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in normal times. ). Among the decorative symbols used also in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the normal state, a pseudo consecutive chance symbol which becomes a pseudo consecutive chance when stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C may be included. .

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-run”, the re-variation (pseudo-run fluctuation) is performed, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display was started several times in succession. Note that in the variable display effect of “pseudo-ren” in this embodiment, re-variation (pseudo-ren fluctuation) is performed at most once for easy understanding, but the variable display effect of “pseudo-ren” is performed. May be executed up to more than one time, for example, two or three times. In the variable display of the “pseudo series” in this embodiment, the pseudo display that temporarily changes the display after the temporary stop display is performed (that is, whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance is temporarily stopped). A reckless production is performed. More specifically, in the pseudo-rendition effect, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-rendition chance symbol is displayed (the pseudo-rendition chance common to the success and failure effects described later). A symbol is displayed), and an effect is performed to inspire whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. A mode in which the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a successful effect, and a mode in which the temporary consecutive stop symbol is not displayed is referred to as a failed effect. As described above, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-run” in this embodiment, since the re-variation is performed at most once, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-run that does not re-perform is performed again. The fluctuating pattern of the gasket only exacerbates the fact (referred to as the fluctuating pattern of the pseudo-flange fake), and when the variable display production of the “pseudo-reen” is performed based on the fluctuating pattern, the failure production is performed. Become. In addition, instead of stopping and displaying a special decorative symbol such as a pseudo-rendition chance symbol in the pseudo-rendition production effect, or in conjunction with the stop display of the special decorative symbol, the variable display of the “pseudo-ren” variable display effect (first variation) ) May be controlled so as to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 5 (to display as a common introduction effect).

  As the variable display effects using such a variable display operation of the decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-ream”, for example, “development chance eye”, “development opportunity eye end”, “slide after stop of chance eye” Such as various effect operations may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of the “development chance eyes”, “left”, “middle”, “right” after the decorative display of the decorative symbol is started and before the fixed decorative symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbols is reached. , A predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the reach state is reached. Expectation is raised.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity eyes”, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, “left,” “middle,” and “right” in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern of a combination predetermined as a development chance eye is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the fixed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. After temporarily displaying the decorative pattern of the loss combination (special combination) which is a pseudo consecutive chance in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo ream" in which the decorative symbols are changed again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are changed again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable symbol display is started. Corresponding to this, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach-loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  Among the special symbols that are usually open round big hit symbols, the special big symbols such as the special symbol showing the number "3" and the variable big hits symbol such as the special symbol showing the number "7" are stopped as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game. When displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol having reached the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect has been executed, or without performing the reach effect, a plurality of types of big hit combinations Among them, the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The fixed decoration symbols to be the big hit combinations are, for example, the symbol numbers variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Any one of the decorative symbols “8” is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything should do.

  After the finalized decorative symbol to be the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the predetermined round in the jackpot game state, whether or not to control to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the probability change is given as a privilege) (No) or a bonus promotion effect that is a bonus giving effect. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot medium promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight each other in the display area of the image display device 5 may be performed. Then, the player may be notified so as to be able to recognize the presence or absence of the promotion to be the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state (whether or not the probable change is given as a privilege) due to the victory or defeat of the main character. Note that the jackpot medium promotion effect is not during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, but during the start of the jackpot gaming state or the period from the end of any round in the jackpot gaming state until the next round starts, The game may be performed in a period from the end of the last round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, the promotion process during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the big hit game state ends. In the big hit game state, the big hit promotion effect that is executed after the last round is completed may be particularly referred to as “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot medium promotion effect, it informs that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game state will be in a probable change state (informs that a privilege will be given) (Notifying that no privilege is given) during a jackpot promotion failure production. Then, when the jackpot medium promotion success effect is executed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. On the other hand, when the promotion failure effect during the big hit is performed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is not controlled to the positive change state (non-probable change state), but is controlled to the time saving state. In the probable change state, in the variable display of each special figure game or decoration symbol, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit game state is improved so as to be higher than the normal state and the time saving state. . Such a probable change state is continued irrespective of the number of executions of the special figure game until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. The time reduction state is a gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control is performed as in the state in which is executed. Such a time saving state is when a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and when a variable display result is “big hit”, one of the conditions is satisfied first. finish.

  In the probable change state or the time saving state, the control is performed by the normal symbol display 20 so that the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game is shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is changed in each ordinary game. Control to increase the probability that the display result is "per-figure" as compared with the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure". The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, for example, by making the tilt control time for performing the control longer than in the normal state, or by increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. In the probable change state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be frequently executed. The time required for the variable display result to become a "big hit" is reduced. Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is easy to be in the big hit gaming state as compared to the normal state (the gaming state is advantageous for the player). The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be either the probable state or the time saving state. . Also, during the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base state. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base state. The time saving state in this embodiment is a game state also called a low-probability high base state, and the normal state is a game state also called a low-probability low base state. The probability change state is a game state also called a high probability and high base state. That is, when the successful promotion during the jackpot is performed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the stable change state, so that the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy high base state. On the other hand, if the promotion failure during the jackpot is performed, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is not controlled to the probable change state (non-probable change state), but is controlled to the time saving state. The state will be controlled.

  In the probability change state, in addition to the one in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control, the one in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control and the high opening control are not performed may be included. As an example, after the end of the 15-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special map game is “probable change big hit”, the first certain change state (high accuracy high state) in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with the certain change control. Base state). Thereafter, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) without the result of the special figure display becoming “big hit”, although the probability change control is continuously performed, the time saving control and the high opening control are performed. May be controlled to a second probable change state (also referred to as a high-probability low-base state) that is not performed after the completion of the operation. In addition, after the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become “probable big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second certainty change state, and only the certainty change control is performed. However, the time saving control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the two-round big hit state based on the variable display result in the special figure game being “probable big hit” in the probability change state or the time saving state, the state shifts to the first probability change state, Time saving control and high opening control may be performed together with the probable change control. Alternatively, after the end of the 15-round jackpot state based on the “probable jackpot”, the state is controlled again to the first probable state until the special figure display result becomes “jackpot”, while the two-round jackpot state based on the “probable jackpot” is controlled. After the end, the state shifts to the first probability change state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the result of the special figure display becoming "big hit", the state shifts to the second probability change state. You may. The time-saving control and the high-opening control are started and finished at the same time (in conjunction with each other), while the start and end of the time-variable control are not necessarily linked with the start and the end of the time-saving control and the high-opening control. You may.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a short-term opening round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, one of a plurality of combinations of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as opening chances may be stopped and displayed without changing the decorative display variable display state to the reach state. In addition, when the short open round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. For example, after completion, a fixed decorative symbol (a fixed decorative symbol serving as a chance corresponding to the state of a short open round big hit) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is the case where the variable display result is "big hit". This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "striking" (also referred to as "striking big hit" or "suddenly changing big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result has been "big hit" for the "big hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state may be controlled.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number of “2” is stopped and displayed, and based on the variable display result being “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit”. However, when the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the special winning symbol that constitutes the opening chance eyes is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol and the special winning opening is in the open state, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "stochastic". Based on this, there is a case where the state is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and a case where the variable display result is controlled to the small hitting game state based on “small hit”. On the other hand, the reason why the special winning symbol is opened after the determined decorative symbol constituting the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "surprise". Only when the state is controlled to the short-term open jackpot state based on this. Accordingly, the fixed decorative symbol constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is in the short-term open big hit state. Corresponds to being controlled.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has mounted thereon various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by controlling lighting / turning off / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and a signal from the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays the image display device 5 and the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the game effect lamp 9. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs effects such as all or a part of the display operation on the image display device 5, all or a part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or a part of the on / off operation of the game effect lamp 9. Function for determining the control content for causing the electrical component for execution to perform a predetermined effect operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. And a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for the purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling the lamp output, which is provided separately from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first reservation display device 25A, a second reservation display device 25B, and a general drawing reservation display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as display control is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing the program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes and temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 102, for example, to periodically or irregularly update various types of numerical data by software, so that a part of various random numbers is May be counted. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 3 shows a fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Among the cases where the display result is "big hit", when the big hit type is "non-probable" or "probable" and "probable", or when the variable display result is "small" Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in a loss variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “loss”. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The super reach variation pattern has a reach effect in a super reach A or super reach B mode, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing". Note that, in the illustrated example, an example is shown in which a variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is performed in a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or a case where the variable display result is “losing”. However, the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” may be performed also when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “shock” or when the variable display result is “small hit”. Further, the variation pattern in which the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is performed is an example of a super reach variation pattern, but may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gasket, there are cases where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, there is a case of normal reach or non-reach. Is also good. Also, as described above, the illustrated example shows an example in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is at most one time, but there is a fluctuation pattern that can be executed up to more than one time, for example, twice or three times. You may. Also, a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo ream” may be performed in other illustrated variation patterns.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. The RAM 102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and an input port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that performs processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122, and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the variable data in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data reading operation for reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes a wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, a wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 13, Wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, the effect control board 12 includes a wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a user's operation has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation is renewably counted by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, in the ROM 121, table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and decision tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like are stored. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, and the like). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data and the like indicating control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, a special figure change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special figure change effect control pattern is a period corresponding to a plurality of kinds of change patterns, during a period from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. It consists of data showing the control contents of various effecting operations such as variable display operation of decorative design, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbol. Have been. The announcement effect control pattern is configured from data indicating control contents of an effect operation which is an announcement effect executed in response to an announcement pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and include data indicating the control contents thereof. The special figure variation effect control patterns may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect form in each reach effect is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of a special figure change) based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, when starting the variable display of a decorative symbol. The effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern) when, for example, starting execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be simply specified. A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from effect control CPU 120 to display control unit 123, sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 receiving the instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in a VRAM. In the voice control board 13 which receives the instruction from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. . Thereafter, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not the value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values. If the value matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initialization after setting the interruption to be prohibited. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initialization is completed, an interrupt is permitted, and then a loop process is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information and the like supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (step). S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random numbers MR1 to MR3 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the ordinary symbol display 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and thereby the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable operation of the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of the tilting motion of the wing pieces.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control board 12 is output in accordance with the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102 After the control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit an effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process performed in step S15 of FIG. In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 in FIG. 5 as a start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 firstly performs the first winning based on a detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the starting port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is ON (Step S201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is equal to the predetermined upper limit value. (For example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S202). The CPU 103 only has to be able to specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 102, for example. If the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 102 is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is turned off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is ON based on a detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is ON (Step S204; Yes), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is equal to the predetermined upper limit value. (For example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 102, for example. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 102 is set to “2” (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the number of special figure reservation storages corresponding to the starting port buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting port buffer, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is added by one, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is added by one. In this manner, the first reserved stored number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved stored number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the count value of the total reserved storage number, which is the storage value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 102, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 selects the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the RAM 102. Is extracted (step S209). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to a big hit game state, and to set the variable display result to a “small hit” for a small hit. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the game state, and takes a value in a range of “1” to “65535”, for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is "big hit", to be any of "non-probable", "probable", and "probable". , For example, a value in the range of “0” to “99”. By executing the process of step S209, the CPU 103 outputs numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. Extract. In this embodiment, the random number value MR1 and the random number value MR2 are extracted in the process of step S209. However, as described above, the random number value MR2 is a random number value used for determining the type of big hit. Therefore, the random number value MR1 may be extracted only when the determination result is “big hit”. In this case, the random number value MR2 may be extracted after it is determined to be Yes in step S241 of FIG.

  Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 and MR2 are set in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A as shown in FIG. When the value is “2”, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 and MR2 is set in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B as shown in FIG. 7B.

  In the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A shown in FIG. 7A, a game ball passes (enters) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and a start winning (first start winning) is generated. The pending data of the special figure game that has been started but has not yet been started (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special map holding storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of game balls) with the first start winning opening with the hold number, and determines the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are set as reserved data, and the number of stored data is a predetermined upper limit. The value is stored until a value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In the second special figure holding storage unit 151B shown in FIG. 7 (B), a game ball passes (enters) a second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and a start winning (second start winning) is obtained. The reservation data of a special figure game that has occurred but has not yet been started (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) into the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition for passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, which is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 as reserved data, and the number is set to a predetermined upper limit value. (Eg, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  Subsequent to the process of step S210 shown in FIG. 6, transmission setting of a start-up winning award designation command according to the start-up opening buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the effect control board is stored. 12 to transmit a first starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established. Make the settings for On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, for example, to the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established. . The starting port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed.

  Thereafter, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, for example, Is set to transmit either the first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the notification or the second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number (step S212). The reserved storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. Note that, in place of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  After executing the processing of step S212, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S213; "1"), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214), and then step S204. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S213; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215). The start winning determination process ends. Thus, even when both the first start-up opening switch 22A and the second start-up opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid winning start of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination processing in step S101 of FIG. 5, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processing of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are stored on the basis of the presence / absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage section 151A and the second special figure hold storage section 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game on the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, it is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, a fixed special symbol (a big hit symbol or a big hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. A small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Is determined as one of a plurality of types. The random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is a random value used to determine a variation pattern in the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1” to “1”. 251 ". When the variable pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process of step S110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variation pattern including a variable display time of a fixed special symbol, a special symbol, and a decoration symbol, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and use the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For determining the variable display mode.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a value stored in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 102, is decremented or added by 1, and the first special symbol display device is added. Regardless of whether the game is the special figure game using the first special figure in 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, the measurement of the elapsed time is performed by the common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change process of step S112 is performed by changing the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is only necessary that the processing be such that the change of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (derived). The processing includes a setting for making the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. Further, the special symbol stop process of step S113 includes a process of determining the end of the time saving state and, when ending, a setting of transmitting a command notifying the effect to the effect control board 12 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 in the command control processing described above).

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit". include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable”. As an example, in response to the jackpot type of “non-probable change” or “probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the maximum number of times the round is executed is set. By setting the number of times of opening of the mouth to “15 times”, the setting of the normal opening big hit state may be performed. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 seconds” in accordance with the jackpot type of “spot”, and the number of times the special winning opening is opened is the upper limit number of times the round is executed. May be set to "15 times" to set the short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”. . In addition, the processing during opening of the big hit in step S115 includes processing for setting, in response to detection of a game ball by the count switch 23, transmission of a prize ball command indicating that to the effect control board 12 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 in the command control processing described above).

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number or the maximum winning opening opening number. In such a case, a process for setting for transmitting the jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of rounds has not reached the maximum winning opening number, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5". The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Includes processing to wait until the time elapses, and processing to perform various settings (start setting of the probable change state and the time saving state) for starting the probable change control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. I have. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", similarly to when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "striking", the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set. The setting of the small hitting game state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits is a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end processing, the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. The process includes a process of waiting until the elapse. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S110 in FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reserved storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the reserved stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B corresponding to the reserved number “1”. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result and a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type are read as data (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process in step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting one from the second reserved figure storage count, for example, and the second special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by one. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry by the unit 151B. (Step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the RAM 102 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is subtracted by one. At this time, the variable special figure designating buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designating buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the first reserved storage number counter value stored in the first reserved storage number counter is read from the RAM 102, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process in step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved storage number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure starts to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be changed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning has occurred, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. What is necessary is just to be able to determine.

  If the number of first special figure reservation storage is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result and a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type are read out as data (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved figure storage count, and the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting one. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry by the unit 151A. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the RAM 102 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is subtracted by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is used as a use table for determining whether to be "big hit" or "losing". The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

  The first special figure display result determination table 130A stores the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as the "small hit" and the small hit game state. It is a table that is referred to to determine. The second special figure display result determination table 130B stores the variable display result before the derived special symbol which is a variable display result in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether to control the variable display result as the "small hit" and the small hit game state. It is a table that is referred to to determine.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, special figure display is performed according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low-precision state), or a probable change state (high-accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to a special map display result such as "big hit", "small hit", or "losing". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability state), or the probable change state (high-probability state), a disturbance for determining the special figure display result is made. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special map display result such as “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the table data indicating the determined value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is such that the special figure display result is represented as "big hit". "Is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the game state is the probable change state (high accuracy state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More determined values are assigned to the special map display result of “big hit” than before. As a result, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special map display result is set to "big hit" as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low-precision state). When the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is compared with the normal state or the time reduction state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control to the big hit gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in a range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, When the variable display result is determined based on the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state as “small hit” can be made different.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit". In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as the state (highly accurate high base state), the small hitting game state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball may occur. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to an extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a determined value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 130A is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. Is also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determined value than in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. In this way, the ratio determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probable change state may be lower than that in the low base state such as the normal state or the probable change state without the time saving state. Good. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied.

  Subsequent to the process of step S239 shown in FIG. 8, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is converted into each of "big hit", "small hit", and "losing". By comparing with the determined value assigned to the special figure display result, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “loss” (step S240).

  In step S239, since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state is selected, in the process of step S240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is changed. It is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" using different determination data depending on whether or not. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is displayed in the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the time saving state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to the table data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probable change state, the game state is displayed in the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the case of the probable change state is selected as special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to the table data.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S241). If it is determined that the hit is a "big hit" (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 is selected and set as the use table for determining the big hit type to one of a plurality of types (step S243).

  The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special map display result is to be set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is to be controlled. Is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the special symbol that has been variably displayed (varied) in the special figure game is the first special figure (the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure). Depending on whether the game is a special symbol display device 4B), a plurality of numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”. Assigned to the type jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, the assignment of the determined value to the big hit type of “probability” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, the determined value in the predetermined range (a value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the “big hit” jackpot type, while the fluctuation special map is Is the second special map, the determined value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probability”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probable” can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is set to “shock” and the state is controlled to be in the short-time open big hit state. In a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game interest due to a prolonged game. .

  Note that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a determined value in a predetermined range different from that in the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determined value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S243 shown in FIG. 8, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to "non-probable", " Which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined is determined according to which one of the determined values assigned to each of the jackpot types “probable change” and “probable” (step S244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be either a time reduction state or a probable state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the time reduction state. Is determined before the determined special symbol as the variable display result is derived. The determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 in accordance with the determined jackpot type (step S245). As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probable”, the jackpot type buffer value is “0”, if “probable”, it is “1”, and if it is “probable”, it is “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not "big hit" (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special map display result is "small hit" (step S246). When it is determined that the small hit is detected (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that it is not "small hit" (step S246; No), or after executing one of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the pre-determination of whether or not, and further, the result of determining the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S248). As an example, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not “small hit” in step S246, the special figure display result becomes a loss design corresponding to a predetermined result of “losing”. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the fixed special symbol. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" in step S246, the small figure hit The special symbol indicating the number "2" as the symbol is set as the fixed special symbol. If the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" in step S241, the big hit symbols "3", "5", and "7" are determined according to the result of the big hit type determination in step S244. Is set as a fixed special symbol. In other words, according to the result of determining the jackpot type to be “non-probable”, a special symbol indicating the number “3” which is a normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, according to the result of determining that the jackpot type is “probable change”, a special symbol indicating the number “7” which is a probable variable jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the fixed special symbol. According to the result of determining the jackpot type to be “spotted”, a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol.

  After setting the fixed special symbol in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal process ends. . If the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in step S235 (step S235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then a special symbol is set. The normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo display setting ends. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting ends.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 in FIG. 5 as a variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit change pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A is selected as a use table for determining a change pattern to one of a plurality of types. It is set (step S262). In addition, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable” (step S263).

  The jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A converts the variation pattern into a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (specified in advance) that the special figure display result should be “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types based on the information. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A, a numerical value (decision) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable”. Value) is one of the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PB4-1, the variation pattern PB4-2, the variation pattern PB5-1 to the variation pattern PB5-4, and the variation pattern PC1-1 to the variation pattern PC1-2. Have been assigned.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A, there is a portion where the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different depending on which of the plurality of types has been determined. . For example, the variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, and variation pattern PB5-1 to variation pattern PB5-depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable” or “probable”. The assignment of the decision value to 4 is different. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern in accordance with the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A, there is a portion where a determined value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types has been determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”, the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PB4-1, the variation pattern PB4-2, and the variation pattern PB5-1 to the variation pattern PB5-4 While the determined values are assigned to the variable patterns, the determined values are not assigned to the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-2. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable”, while the determined values are assigned to the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-2, the variation patterns PA4-1 and PB4 are determined. -1, No determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 and the fluctuation patterns PB5-1 to PB5-4. With this, when the special map display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-time open big hit state according to "probability", the variation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

  In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be any of “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probable state, or the time reduction state Thus, the assignment of the determined value to each variation pattern may be made different. This makes it possible to vary the rate determined by the same variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types of game state. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be any of “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable state, or a time-saving state. Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types of game state. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “non-probable”, more determined values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 indicating the normal reach fluctuation pattern than in the case of “probable”. . Therefore, when the super-reach reach production is executed, the probability of the jackpot type being “probable change” is higher than “non-probable change”, so that the player can be expected to play. Interest can be improved. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A, more variation values are assigned to the variation pattern performing the super reach B reach effect than to the variation pattern performing the super reach A reach effect. ing.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 shown in FIG. 11 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 132B shown in FIG. And set (step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), the loss variation pattern determination table 132C shown in FIG. 12C is used as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. Select and set (step S267). For example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 102 is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in which the time reduction control is performed in the gaming state or the time reduction state (step S268). ).

  The loss variation pattern determination table 132C indicates, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result should be “losing”, determines the variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not to make a decision.

  In the losing variation pattern determination table 132C, the determined values are set such that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving control is being performed in the time saving state. Some parts are assigned to patterns. Thus, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, there is a portion in which a determined value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time reduction control in the time reduction state. Thereby, it is possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time saving control in the time saving state. In the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 132A of FIG. 12A, more determination values are determined than the determination values assigned to the variation patterns for performing the super-reach reach effect. Values are assigned to non-reach variability patterns. Therefore, when the super-reach reach effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit is high. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 132C, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 132A of FIG. Decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the super reach B has a higher expectation of a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super reach A. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention also to the type of the reach effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268 shown in FIG. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in (step S269). Here, in the process of step S269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game executed using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined. Or whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game executed using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition is determined. Using the numerical data representing the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern updated by the common random counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined to any one of a plurality of types by the common processing module.

  When the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type specified by the process of step S263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit variation pattern determination table 132A, and the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating is assigned. In this manner, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to determine any one of the plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is only necessary to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 132B and determine the variation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. In this manner, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to determine a variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the change pattern is determined in the process of step S269, thereby determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. That is, the process of step S269 includes a process of determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbol is to be the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”.

  After the variation pattern is determined in step S269, a special figure variation time that is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S270). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (the special figure display result). It is.

  After executing the processing of step S270, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special game on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games using the figures (step S271). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S272). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the prepared first variation start command table is transmitted in the RAM 102. The data is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the prepared second variation start command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  Here, the first variation start command is a command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variation start command is a command for designating the start of variation in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The game state designation command is a command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Based on the command transmission setting in step S272, every time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, The change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first hold storage number notification command, or the second hold storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after transmitting the variable display result notification command first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command The command may be transmitted in the order of a game state designation command, a first reserved storage number notification command, or a second reserved storage number notification command.

  After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step S273), and then the change pattern setting processing ends.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in the RAM 102 is on (step S291). Here, the special figure confirmed display flag is set to an on state by the processing of step S295 described later, in response to the confirmed special symbol being a variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  If the special figure fixed display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), the setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the decoration symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure fixed display time (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value predetermined in correspondence with the special figure fixed display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102. Then, the special-symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), and then the special symbol stop processing ends. After the determined special symbol is derived and displayed in the process of step S292 in this way, until the special symbol finalized display time set in step S294 elapses, the special symbol is processed by the special symbol process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  If the special figure fixed display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure fixed display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value has been set by the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0” is determined. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value of the game control process is a value other than “0”, the timer value is updated so as to be decremented by one every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. I just need. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process stands by until the special figure confirmation display time elapses.

  If the special figure fixed display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), the special figure fixed display in progress flag is cleared and turned off (step S297), and it is determined whether the big hit flag is on. A determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the big hit start effect waiting time (step S299). Further, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance to transmit the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is stored in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store it in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). Further, a setting for ending the probable change state or the time saving state is performed (step S302). For example, as the process of step S302, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn off the status, a process of clearing the time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of special figure games executed during the high base, and the like. Should be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-big hit opening process (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process ends.

  If the big hit flag is off at step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S304; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the small hit start effect waiting time (step S305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the fact that the special figure display result is “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S309). After executing one of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control or the high-opening control during the high base is to be ended (step S311), and if it is to be ended (step S311; Yes), the time saving control, the high opening control, and the like are ended, and a setting for transmitting the time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving state is made (step S312), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (Step S311; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S311, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value stored in the time reduction frequency counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time-saving number count value matches a predetermined time-saving end determination value (for example, “0”). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, the time saving control and the high opening control during the high base may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning off the time. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop processing may be ended. In addition, even when the game state is the probable change state, if the time-saving flag is on, it may be determined whether to end the time-saving control, and the time-saving control may be ended based on the result of the determination that the time-saving control is to be ended. While the time saving control is ended in this way, the probability change control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. As a result, the game state can be changed to a latent probability change. In the probable change state in which the time saving flag is on and the probable change flag is on, the time saving control is continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  In the process of step S311, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the end of the probability change control is extracted from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and a probability change control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to end the probabilistic change control, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probable change control reaches a predetermined probable change end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S311, the process for terminating the probable change control may not be performed, and the probable change control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 14 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control signal serving as an effect control command is sent from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. Take in. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. For example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and a command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S74, it is determined whether an abnormal command has been received from the main board 11 (step S75). The abnormal command is related to winning such as, for example, making it appear that the player has won a prize even though the player has not actually won (more specifically, detecting a prize to a variable prize device that is not actually opened). This command is transmitted when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities is detected, such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality caused by the upper plate or the lower plate being filled with game balls (dish abnormality). As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 11 side. If it is determined that an abnormal command has been received (step S75; Yes), an abnormal notification process for notifying the player that an abnormality has occurred is executed (step S76). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a process of displaying a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, turning on a lamp, or outputting sound may be performed. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification can be executed at any timing by receiving the abnormality command by the process of step S76, and an icon as a specific display is displayed. The abnormality notification can be performed within a predetermined period after the notification that the error has occurred.

  After executing the processing of step S76, or when it is determined in step S75 that no abnormal command has been received (step S75; No), it is determined whether or not the effect setting has been performed by the player (step S77). . In the process of step S77, for example, it is determined whether or not an effect setting button (not shown) has been operated by the player by confirming whether or not the sensor for detecting the operation of the player has detected. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S77; Yes), the effect setting process is performed (step S78). In the process of step S78, the operation setting button is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the type of the output music and the background, the luminance setting of the image display device 5, the game effect lamp, and the like. It is only necessary to change the settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of various lamps such as 9. In addition, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or to perform a different operation corresponding to a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, by performing the processing in step S78, the setting relating to the effect can be executed at any timing due to the operation of the player, and the specific display The setting regarding the effect can be made even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed. Specifically, the process of step S78 can be executed at any timing, such as during demonstration display, during variable display, and during control of a big hit game. Note that the process of step S78 may not be executable during a period (for example, 0.1 second) from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display. Specifically, the process of step S78 may be prohibited during a period from the reception of the symbol confirmation command to the reception of the change start command.

  After executing the process of step S78, or when it is determined in step S77 that the effect setting has not been performed (step S77; No), the effect control process process is executed (step S79). In the effect control process process of step S79, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative illuminant such as a decoration LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S80), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random numbers used for the effect control is converted by software. Update. After that, the process returns to the step S72.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process performed in step S79 in FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122 or the like, for example. I do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command or a second variation start command from the main board 11 has been received, etc. And the like.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is performed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform the variable display execution setting and other various effecting operations, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to a special symbol variation pattern, a type of display result, and the like. . In addition, in the variable display start setting process, according to the degree of advantage, a special display effect execution setting in which a special image such as an icon as a specific display is displayed in a stepwise manner, or an advantageous state such as a cut-in notice or a step-up notice. The execution setting of a notice effect as an effect suggesting that the control is performed is performed. Note that the degree of advantage for the player refers to, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state in which a privilege is given, or a state in which a privilege is given, or a state in which the rate of privilege grant is high). , An advantageous state different from a privilege), or a ratio in an advantageous state. In addition, the privilege indicated to be highly likely to be given by the special mode may be the same as the object of the advantage (advantageous state) for the player, and is different from the object of the advantage for the player. It may be something. Further, the specific display effect in this embodiment indicates that a special image such as an icon as a specific display is displayed in a stepwise manner in accordance with the degree of advantage. For example, the specific display is a variable display. Display (active display) or meter display, and various types of effects such as those that gradually change the display mode of the active display and those that gradually increase the meter display. May be. That is, the concept of the step-by-step change of the specific display includes a step-by-step display of a special image such as an icon, a step-by-step change of the active display mode, and an increase (or decrease) of the meter display. For example.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122, and executes various control data during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Effect control. In the variable display effect processing, a specific display effect or a notice effect is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern at the time of changing the special figure, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. In response to the above, a fixed decorative symbol as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special figure variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is provided. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the determined decorative symbol can be autonomously derived and displayed on the side of the effect control board 12 without depending on the effect control command from the main board 11, and the variable display result can be fixed. When the fixed decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting processing, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6” corresponding to the big hit medium effect process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Is updated to “4”. Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing”, and the value of the effect process flag is set to the initial value. Update to "0". The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 includes a process for setting the execution of the above-described jackpot medium promotion effect when the hit start designation command designates the start of the jackpot game state except for "striking". ing.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. To output sound or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (effect sound signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the game effect lamp 9 by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls in the small hitting game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the decoration LED. In the small hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end production. .

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. To output sound or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (effect sound signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the game effect lamp 9 by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hitting game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the decoration LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern corresponding to the production content in the big hit game state, and displays a production image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. Also, the output of a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13 causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output sounds and sound effects, and the output of the command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 and decoration Various effect control in the big hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the use LED, is executed. In the big hit middle production process, control for executing a big hit middle promotion effect and a notification effect is performed. Further, in the big hit middle rendering process, the value of the rendering control process flag is updated to “7”, which is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process, in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 5. Output of a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13 to output a sound or a sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R; Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the LED at the end of the big hit game state are executed.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S171 in FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 15, first, for example, by reading EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, the special figure display result It is determined whether or not it becomes (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S551; Yes), the specified fluctuation pattern is read, for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" (step S552).

  When it is determined in step S552 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the combination of the final decorative symbols that constitute the final non-reach combination is determined (step S553). As an example, in the process of step S553, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left determined value stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a right determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thereby, the right determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium-fixed symbol to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the middle fixed decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S554). As an example, in the process of step S554, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left-right determined value stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers which are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the decoration pattern. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, and by referring to a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like, Then, among the determined decorative symbols, the middle determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, in the case where the determined decorative symbol is a big hit combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol and the right determined decorative symbol, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to or from the symbol number of the medium determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative symbol, a difference (symbol difference) between the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol with the symbol number may be determined, and a middle fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S551 that the special figure display result is not "losing" (step S551; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is "small hit" or "probability" (step S555). ). When it is determined that the pattern is “small hit” or “shock” (step S555; Yes), the final decorative pattern corresponding to the “small hit” or “shock”, such as the opening chance, is determined. The combination is determined (step S557). As an example, in response to a case where any one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of opening chances is determined. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

  When it is determined in step S525 that it is "non-probable" or "probable" other than "small hit" (step S555; Yes), a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S556). As an example, in the process of step S556, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the RAM 122 is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot determined symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Decide the decoration pattern.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probable” or “probable”, in the process of step S556, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable-variable designs is displayed. What is necessary is just to select and determine it as the fixed decoration symbol which comprises a big hit combination.

  After executing any of the processes of step S553, step S554, step S556, and step S557, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the specific display effect in which a special image such as an icon is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. Is performed (step S559).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific display effect execution setting process performed in step S559 in FIG. In the specific display effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the specific display effect (step S601). Specifically, in the process of step S601, whether or not to execute the specific display effect is determined with reference to the specific display effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 18A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a specific display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the specific display effect is set to the illustrated determination ratio according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to "big hit" is higher when the specific display effect is executed than when the specific display effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the specific display effect is executed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio is different depending on whether it is a super reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. (It is determined that the super reach big hit is executed more than the normal reach big hit.) If the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determined rate may be further changed according to the variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the processing of step S601, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the specific display effect in step S601 (step S602). When it is determined not to execute the specific display effect (step S602; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific display effect is to be executed (step S602; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode of the specific display effect (step S603). Specifically, in the process of step S603, the execution mode of the specific display effect is determined to be one of a plurality of modes with reference to the specific display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a specific display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the specific display effects such as “pattern A”, “pattern B”, and “pattern C” are set, and the variable display result is displayed. The determined ratio is set accordingly. Specifically, the mode of “pattern A” is a mode in which a star icon is displayed, and the mode of “pattern B” is a mode in which a star icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode of "C" is a mode in which a star icon, a triangular icon, and a round icon are displayed. As shown in the drawing, the specific display effect execution mode determination table in this embodiment shows that the “pattern B” mode is more “pattern C” mode than the “pattern B” mode than the “pattern A” mode. Is set such that the ratio of the variable display result being "big hit" is higher when the icon is executed (that is, the ratio of displaying more icons being "big hit") Is determined so that is higher). Therefore, the development destination of the effect is different depending on which icon is displayed, and it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed. In the illustrated example, three types of “pattern A” to “pattern C” are shown. However, even if there is a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a circular icon is displayed, Good. Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the specific display effect is one (only the presence or absence of execution is determined in step S601 in FIG. 17), but the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times. (The larger the number of executions, the higher the ratio of "big hits"). In that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time the execution is performed (see FIG. 17). The number of executions may also be determined in step S601, and a mode corresponding to the variation pattern and the number of times may be determined in the process of step S603). Further, the number of displayed icons may be the same, or the ratio of “big hit” may be changed according to the combination of displayed icons (ie, the number of icons displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined at different rates).

  Returning to FIG. 17, after performing the processing of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gasse that performs only the pseudo continuous swaying effect without performing the pseudo continuous fluctuation (PB3-1, PB3- shown in FIG. 3). 2, PB5-1 and PB5-2) are determined by confirming the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step S604). When it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-sequence (step S604; No), that is, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern for performing the pseudo-sequence fluctuation, or when the fluctuation pattern is not the pseudo-sequence fluctuation pattern, the execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 1, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined (step S605), and the specific display effect execution setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pattern is a fluctuating pattern of pseudo continuous gasses (step S604; Yes), the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 19B (step S606). Then, the specific display effect execution setting process ends. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, a maximum of one pseudo-run change is performed (one re-change), but a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” is provided. May be executed up to more than one time, for example, two or three times. In this case, in the step S604 of FIG. It is determined whether or not an effect is performed, and when a failed effect is executed, a timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined with reference to an execution timing determination table in which the superimposition timing cannot be selected).

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 which is referred to when the pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is performed or is not a pseudo-run fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 2 which is referred to in the case of a fluctuation pattern of pseudo continuous gasses. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 19A, three types of timings, such as “timing 1” to “timing 3”, are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratios. Note that “timing 1” to “timing 3” shown in FIG. 19A are execution timings set in advance in accordance with the variation pattern. The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of “timing 1” to “timing 3” may be different timings according to the variation pattern. For example, the execution timing of “timing 1” may be a common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 19B, two types of timings such as “timing 1” and “timing 3” are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. . As will be described in detail later, the execution timing of “timing 2” is set to the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the specific display effect overlap, and the other “timing 1” and “ The execution timing of the “timing 3” is set to an execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap (see FIG. 21). In the illustrated example, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. .

  Here, the specific display effect and its execution timing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing details of the specific display effect. As shown in FIG. 20, when the specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect that suggests whether or not to display an icon as a specific display (see FIGS. 27B to 27E). If the effect of the predetermined effect indicates success, the specific effect is specified. The specific display change notification for notifying that the icon is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and thereafter, the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S603 in FIG. (Specific display changes). Then, the specific display effect ends. In this embodiment, the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and then the specific display is changed. However, the specific display change notification is continuously performed during the above-described predetermined period of 10 seconds. It may not be performed, for example, may be performed continuously for 6 seconds, and the specific display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the notice effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, but the specific display change notification is continuously performed during the predetermined period. The period may be a period by an effect as described above, or a period counted by a timer, such as 10 seconds. Further, the example shown in FIG. 20 shows a case where the effect of the predetermined effect indicates success (in this embodiment, the effect of the predetermined effect is always assumed to indicate success for easy understanding). However, the effect of the predetermined effect may indicate a failure. In that case, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed) and the specific display effect ends as it is. Good. The process of step S601 in FIG. 17 determines whether or not to execute such a specific display effect. Note that, when the effect of the predetermined effect includes a result indicating failure, the mode of executing the predetermined effect indicating failure may be selected in the process of step S603 illustrated in FIG.

  FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the specific display effect. FIG. 21 (A) shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gaseous pattern, and FIG. 21 (B) shows the case of the fluctuation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gaseous pattern. It shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the variation pattern to be performed. FIG. 21 (C) shows the case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gasket, and specifically shows the execution timing of the specific display effect in the case of the variation pattern of the non-reach loss. In the illustrated example, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is shown, and the other variation patterns are not shown. However, in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, “ “Timing 1” to “Timing 3” are set in advance. As shown in FIG. 21 (A), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-running gas, the executed pseudo-running-in effect becomes a failure effect. As described above, in the specific display effect, after the result indicating the success of the predetermined effect is displayed, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed is continuously performed for the predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if a failed production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-running production, the player will be discouraged and the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-running gas, the execution of the “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-running-up effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Timing cannot be selected. Therefore, in the processing of step S606 in FIG. 17, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. are doing. Thereby, the execution of the failed effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification of the display of the icon as the specific display is performed, and a decrease in gaming interest is prevented. When the execution timing is determined in the case where the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times with the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gas, a plurality of timings are selected from execution timings other than “timing 2” in the process of step S606 in FIG. do it. In addition, when the effect of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates a failure, the above-mentioned situation does not occur, so that the execution timing of “timing 2” may be selectable (FIG. 21B described later). the same as). On the other hand, even when the effect of the predetermined effect in the specific display effect indicates a failure, the execution timing of “timing 2” is made unselectable, and after the notification that the icon is not displayed is notified (the predetermined effect as the mini game) The failure effect may be prevented from being performed for a predetermined period of time after the result of (2) has failed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the failure of the result of the predetermined effect and the execution of the failed effect. Further, in this embodiment, it is notified that the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed cannot be selected, and that an icon as a specific display is displayed. Although the example in which the execution of the failed effect is prohibited for a predetermined period after the above is shown, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous fanning effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed may be selectable. In such a case, the failure effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a display smaller than usual or a display that is transparent. In addition, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous fanning effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed is not made unselectable, but is determined, for example, to a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. The ratio may be limited by making the ratio extremely low as compared with the case where no failed effect is performed. That is, the restriction on the execution of the failed effect includes, in addition to the case where the execution is not performed, the case where the execution is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the case where the execution is performed at an extremely low rate. In addition, the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous fanning effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed can be selected, and when “timing 2” is determined, “timing 2” and “timing 2” are selected. By performing a process of shifting the execution timing of the specific display effect to a timing such as “timing 2.5” which is an execution timing between “timing 3”, the pseudo display after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is performed. It may be possible to restrict the failure production from being performed as a continuous production.

  Further, for example, when the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined as “timing 1” as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the failure effect is performed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect after a certain period has elapsed. Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to further prevent the player from being discouraged, in the case of the fluctuating pattern of the pseudo-sequence gasket, “Timing 1” and “Timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo-rendition effect. The set timing may not be selectable (failure effects are also restricted during the period after the icon as the specific display is displayed). According to this, since the execution of the failed effect is restricted after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed, it is possible to further prevent the gaming interest from being reduced. Note that while the “timing 2” cannot be selected, the determination rate determined as the “timing 1” may be an extremely low determination rate such as 1% or 2%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is performed, the pseudo-running-in effect is a successful effect. Therefore, the event that the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time and a failure effect is performed after it is suggested that the specific display change is advantageous to the player does not occur. Therefore, as shown in the figure, as the execution timing of the specific display effect, it is also possible to select the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the specific display effect are superimposed. That is, in the process of step S605 in FIG. 17, the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 19A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 21C, in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, similarly, in the processing of step S605 in FIG. 17, the execution timing of “timing 2” is shown in FIG. 19A. Although the execution timing of the specific display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of “timing 1” is compared with the case of the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. Are common timings (for example, two seconds after the start of the variable display), but the execution timings of “timing 2” and “timing 3” are different. As described above, by providing an execution timing different from the common execution timing according to the variation pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect. Note that, as shown in FIG. 21C, a specific display effect can be executed even with a variation pattern of performing pseudo-run variation and a variation pattern of pseudo-running gas. According to this, in the first place, in the predetermined period after the notification of the display of the icon as the specific display is performed, the pseudo-running effect is not executed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. If the execution timing is determined in a case where the specific display effect is executed a plurality of times in the variation pattern in which the pseudo-run variation is performed (in a variation pattern other than the pseudo-continuation flap), the “timing 1” is determined in the process of step S605 in FIG. A plurality of timings may be selected from all the execution timings of “to 3”. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B (the same applies to the case of a variation pattern that becomes a reach instead of a variation pattern of a pseudo series), the execution timing of the specific display effect is the timing before the reach, but the reach is performed. During the specific display effect may be executed. In addition, the pseudo-run variation may be one or more times, one specific display effect may be performed for one variation including the first variation, or in one variation including the first variation. A plurality of specific display effects may be performed. Further, when a plurality of specific display effects are performed, the number of icons displayed in a stepwise manner increases (for example, when three specific display effects are performed in total, one icon is displayed in one specific display effect). Displayed, and finally three icons are displayed, etc.), so that the mode of increasing the degree of advantage may be sufficient.

  Returning to FIG. 16, after executing the specific display effect execution setting process of step S559, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user of the cut-in notice or the step-up notice for notifying whether or not the variable display result is "big hit". A preview effect execution setting process for performing the effect execution setting is performed (step S560).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the announcement effect execution setting process performed in step S560 of FIG. In the announcement effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute an announcement effect (step S901). Specifically, in the process of step S901, the presence / absence of execution of a notice effect is determined with reference to a notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description and facilitate understanding, it is assumed that a cut-in notice is executed as a notice effect, but other kinds of notice effects may be executed, Different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display results.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute a notice effect is set to a determined ratio shown in the figure according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio in which the variable display result is "big hit" is higher in the case where the preview effect is performed than in the case where the preview effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after executing the processing of step S901, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a notice effect in step S901 (step S902). When it is determined not to execute the notice effect (Step S902; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the notice effect (Step S602; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the specific display effect has been set in the specific display effect execution setting process in Step S560 of FIG. (Step S904). If it is determined that the execution setting of the specific display effect has not been made (step S904; No), the execution timing of the notice effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution setting of the specific display effect has been performed (step S904; Yes), any of the execution timing determination tables B to D shown in FIGS. Is referred to according to the execution timing of the specific display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the announcement effect execution setting process ends.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to in order to determine an execution timing of a notice effect. FIG. 24A shows a configuration example of an execution timing determination table A which is referred to when the specific display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 24A, four types of timings, such as “timing A” to “timing D”, are set, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. FIGS. 24B to 24D show configuration examples of the execution timing determination tables B to D that are referred to when a specific display effect is executed. Specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing of “timing 1”. The execution timing determination table D is a table that is referred to when executed at the timing, and is a table that is referred to when the specific display effect is executed at the timing of “timing 3”. The execution timing of the notice effect is set in each of the execution timing determination tables B to D so that the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. 25). reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. . In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the execution timing is determined regardless of the variable display result. The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (as opposed to this, the earlier the execution timing is, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention also about the timing at which the notice effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, an example is shown in which each of the execution timing determination tables B to D is prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the specific display effect. In the processing of step S906 in FIG. 22, a determination table in which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not selected from the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. It may be. According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the execution timing of the specific display effect and the preview effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the specific display effect is executed. When the specific display effect is not executed, any one of the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” shown in the drawing may be determined (see FIG. 24A). The timing of “X” shown in FIG. 25 shows an example in which an error occurs at the timing or an effect setting is performed by the player, and a description thereof will be omitted. The case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” or the case where the effect setting is performed by the player will be described later. Further, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), Since the specific display effect ends as it is, the execution timing of the notice effect may be determined from any of the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D”.

  Specifically, FIG. 25A is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the announcement effect in the case where the specific display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 19 (see FIG. 21). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 1”, any of timings “timing B” to “timing D” other than “timing A” is determined as the execution timing of the announcement effect (“ Timing A "cannot be selected.) That is, in the process of step S906 in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect with reference to the execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the execution timing of “timing B” is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the notice effect are overlapped, and “timing B” is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. Although it is possible, in this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each effect. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 25A, an example is shown in which a failed effect is executed as a pseudo-running effect, but the same applies to a case in which a successful effect is executed. Further, similarly to the case of determining the execution timing of the specific display effect, “Timing B” can be selected as the execution timing of the notice effect when the successful effect is executed, and “Timing B” is executed when the failure effect is executed. May be unselectable (when the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the specific display effect). .

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect in the case where the specific display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 19 (see FIG. 21). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 2”, the timing of any of “timing A”, “timing C” and “timing D” other than “timing B” is set to the execution timing of the notice effect. (“Timing B” cannot be selected). That is, in the process of step S906 in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect by referring to the execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the specific display effect is the same as the end timing of the pseudo-running effect. However, this is an example, and may be different from each other.

  FIG. 25C is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect in the case where the specific display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 19 (see FIG. 21). As shown in the figure, when the specific display effect is executed at “timing 3”, any one of “timing A”, “timing B”, and “timing D” other than “timing C” is set to the timing of the announcement effect. (“Timing C” cannot be selected). That is, in the process of step S906 in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect with reference to the execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the execution timing of “timing D” is set as an execution timing in which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not overlapped. That is, the execution timing of “timing D” is an execution timing that can be commonly selected regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, the notice effect is executed at a timing corresponding to the execution timing of the specific display effect, and the notice operation is performed at a common timing regardless of the execution timing of the specific display effect (even when the specific display effect is not executed). An effect may be performed, and the effect can be expanded.

  As described above, in the specific display effect, after the result indicating the success of the predetermined effect is displayed, the specific display change notification for notifying that the icon as the specific display is displayed is continuously performed for the predetermined period. It is suggested that it is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within a predetermined period from the notification that the icon is displayed until the icon is displayed (the specific display changes), the effect of the specific display effect is reduced. Would. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not overlapped is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. This limits the execution of the announcement effect within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is to be displayed, and prevents the effect of the effect from being reduced. In this embodiment, the execution timing in which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is not selectable, and during a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is given. Although the example in which the execution of the notice effect is prohibited is shown, the execution timing in which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed may be selectable. The announcement effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as by displaying the image in a transparent manner. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case where the notice effect is not executed but also the case where the effect is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Further, as described above, even when the specific display effect is executed, if the effect of the predetermined effect as the mini game indicates failure, the specific display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed. ), Since the specific display effect ends as it is, an event that the effect of the specific display effect is reduced does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the execution timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the execution period of the notice effect need not be selected cannot be selected (the execution of the notice effect need not be limited).

  Returning to FIG. 16, after executing the notice effect execution setting process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 executes other effects such as an effect for inducing whether or not to reach or a chance-up notice to be performed in the reach state, for example. Whether or not to perform, and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be performed are made, and an effect control pattern serving as a use pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S561). The effect control CPU 120 stores a plurality of pre-stored and prepared in the ROM 121 corresponding to, for example, a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command, a specific display effect or a notice effect determined in steps S559 and S560. One of the effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern. Subsequently, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as an effect control timer setting unit) is set in accordance with, for example, the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S562).

  Then, a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is performed (step S563). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S561 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the image display device 5 May be started in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right" provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S563, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S564), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To end.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. When the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 26 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step S801). The effect control CPU 120 updates, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and reads an end code from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the specific display effect period in which the specific display effect is executed (step S802). ). If the specific display effect period is predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S561 in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the specific display effect and the timing in the process of step S559 in FIG. Good.

  When it is determined that it is the specific display effect period (Step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control of the specific display effect (Step S803). Thereby, the specific display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S803, as described above, the predetermined effect as the mini game is performed, and after the success of the predetermined effect is indicated, the specific notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is displayed. The display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon in the mode determined in step S603 of FIG. 17 is displayed (the specific display changes). In the case where the effect of the predetermined effect indicates a failure, the specific display change notification need not be performed after the predetermined effect indicating the failure has been performed in the process of step S803 (the icon need not be displayed). ).

  After executing the process of step S803, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the specific display effect period (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notice effect period for executing the notice effect. A determination is made (step S802). The notice effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S561 in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect and the timing in the process of step S560 in FIG. If it is determined that it is the notice effect period (step S804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control of the notice effect (step S805). Thereby, a notice effect is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S805, or when it is determined in step S804 that it is not the announcement effect period (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S806). The reach effect period may be predetermined in an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern, for example. If it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the reach effect, such as displaying a background image for the reach effect (step S807).

  After execution of the process of step S807, or when it is determined in step S806 that the current time is not the reach effect period (step S806; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on this, control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step S808), and the variable display effect process ends.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S809; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the apparatus stands by.

  If the symbol determination command is received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) as a display result in the variable display of symbols (step S810). Subsequently, a predetermined period of time is set as the jackpot start designation command reception waiting time (step S811). Next, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S812), and ends the effect process during variable display.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation in the case where a specific display effect and a failed effect as a pseudo-running effect are executed. More specifically, an example of an effect operation in which a specific display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” illustrated in FIG. When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 27 (a), a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed and a specific display effect is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b). In the example shown in the figure, a character appears as a predetermined effect, and a mode in which success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect. May be. Further, as the effect result of the predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above.

  Then, the predetermined effect proceeds as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) to 27 (d), and when the success of the effect of the predetermined effect is shown as shown in FIG. 27 (e), FIG. 27 (f) As shown, it is notified that an icon is displayed as specific display change notification (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, a star-shaped icon is displayed because the pattern “Pattern A” is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous fanning effect is performed to determine whether the “re” mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo consecutive chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (j), a failure effect is executed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect, and the “re” mark as the pseudo continuous chance symbol is brought into the reach state without being temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the reach state is set after the pseudo-running production (failure production), but the reach state may not be reached after the failure production. In the example shown in FIG. 27J, the display position of the icon display as the specific display is moved, but the display position does not have to be moved. At that time, the display priority may or may not be given priority to the icon display.

  In this way, when a failed production is performed as a pseudo-running production, the timing at which the execution period of the failed production does not overlap with the execution period of the specific display production is determined as the execution timing of the specific display production. Does not overlap with the execution period of the failed effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the failure effect being performed after the notification (change) of the icon as the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Instead of using the timing at which the execution period of the failed production does not overlap with the execution period as the execution timing of the specific display production, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display production does not overlap with the execution period may be used as the execution timing of the failed production. . That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the specific display effect, the execution timing of the failed effect may be adjusted. Specifically, the execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of timings set in advance so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation in a case where a specific display effect and a successful effect as a pseudo continuous fanning effect are executed. Specifically, FIG. 21B shows an example of an effect operation in which a specific display effect is performed at an execution timing of “timing 2” illustrated in FIG. 21B, and a pseudo-running-in effect of a successful effect is performed. 28 (a) to 28 (f) are the same as FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (f), and a description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 28, since the successful effect is performed as the pseudo-running effect, the pseudo-running effect is executed even after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (g), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous fueling effect is performed to determine whether the “re” mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (i), a successful effect is executed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo consecutive chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when a predetermined period elapses after the re-variation is performed, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. 28 (j). In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which an icon as a specific display is displayed after a predetermined period elapses at the time of a re-change, but the timing at which the predetermined period elapses (that is, the timing of a specific display change) is earlier. It may be. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 28 (h), a predetermined period may elapse during the execution of the pseudo-running effect, and an icon may be displayed as a specific display. In addition, when a successful effect is performed as the pseudo-tanning effect and a specific display effect is performed, the elapsed time of the predetermined period may be the same as the end timing of the pseudo-tanning effect. In addition, the end timing of the pseudo-running effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be independently determined. As described above, when the successful production is performed as the pseudo-running production, the situation in which the player is not discouraged does not occur. Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific effect.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when a specific display effect and a notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in which a specific display effect is performed at an execution timing of “timing 1” illustrated in FIG. 25A and then a notice effect is performed at an execution timing of “timing B” is shown. ing. Note that the example shown in FIG. 25A shows an example in which the execution period of the notice effect is superimposed on the execution period of the pseudo-running effect, but in the example shown in FIG. The effect operation example of the pseudo continuous fanning effect is omitted.

  When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 29A, a predetermined effect as a mini game is executed as shown in FIG. 29B, and a specific display effect is started. In the example shown in the figure, a character appears as a predetermined effect, and a mode in which success is achieved by rotating the displayed coin is shown as an example of the predetermined effect. May be. Further, as the effect result of the predetermined effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above. Then, the predetermined effect proceeds as shown in FIGS. 29 (c) to 29 (d), and when the success of the effect of the predetermined effect is indicated as shown in FIG. 29 (e), FIG. 29 (f) As shown, it is notified that an icon is displayed as specific display change notification (specific display change notification is executed). The specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, an icon is displayed as a specific display as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, a star-shaped icon is displayed because the pattern “Pattern A” is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (h), a cut-in notice is given as a notice effect. In addition, in addition to the illustrated example, a cut-in notice of a different mode may be executed according to the ratio of “big hit”, or a step-up notice or a battle effect may be performed in addition to the cut-in notice. It may be.

  As described above, when the specific display effect is executed, the timing at which the execution period of the specific display effect and the notice effect are not overlapped is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. The effect execution period does not overlap. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the effect of the announcement from being reduced for a predetermined period after the notification (change) of the icon as the specific display is given, thereby reducing the effect. .

FIG. 30 shows an example of the rendering operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. More specifically, an abnormal command indicating that a prize to a variable prize device that is not actually opened (prize prize abnormality) is detected from the side of the main board 11 at a timing “X” shown in FIG. An example is shown in the case of receiving at a timing after the specific display change notification in the specific display effect is performed). As shown in FIG. 30A, after the specific display change notification is performed,
When an abnormal command is received at the timing "X" shown in FIG. 25, it is determined in step S75 shown in FIG. 14 that an abnormal command has been received, and an abnormality notification process is performed in the process of step S76. Then, by the processing, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), an abnormality notification in a mode corresponding to the type of the abnormal command received is performed (in the example shown, an example of displaying a message of "winning abnormality occurred!" However, besides, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on, or a different mode of notification may be performed according to the preset importance of the abnormality.) Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as the specific display is displayed as shown in FIG. 30C (the specific display changes). Although the example shown in the figure shows an example in which the abnormality notification is deleted at the timing of FIG. 30C, the abnormality notification is continuously performed until the operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed. You may. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification (change) of the icon as the specific display is notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 31 shows an example of the effect operation in the case where the effect setting is performed by the player at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 25. Specifically, an example in which the player performs an operation to increase the volume of the effect at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 25 (the timing after the specific display change notification in the specific display effect is performed). Is shown. As shown in FIG. 31A, after the specific display change notification is performed, if the effect setting is performed at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 25 (when the operation by the player is detected), the process illustrated in FIG. 14 is performed. It is determined that the effect setting has been performed in step S77, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S78. Then, as a result of the processing, a notification that the volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 31B (in the illustrated example, that the volume has been changed from “6” to “7”) is notified (setting change notification). ), A process of increasing the volume output by the effect is performed. Then, after the specific display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as the specific display is displayed as shown in FIG. 30C (the specific display changes). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed be displayed in a manner that the specific display change notification and the specific display do not become unrecognizable to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the setting related to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered. Note that, when the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed during the same period, the abnormality notification may be performed with priority (such as setting the abnormality notification layer to the player side than the setting change layer). . Further, some types of abnormalities may not be given priority over setting change notification.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the following effects can be obtained.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failed effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes), and a decrease in the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo-reinforcement effect may not be selectable as the execution timing of the specific display effect. According to this, an icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Since the execution of the failed effect is limited after the notification that the game is performed is performed, it is possible to further prevent the game entertainment from being reduced. Further, when the specific display effect is started, a predetermined effect as a mini game is performed, and when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success, a specific display change notifying that an icon as a specific display is displayed. The notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S603 in FIG. 17 (the specific display changes). The effect control CPU 120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the specific display effect. For this reason, the execution of the failed production is restricted during the period from the time when the success is shown as the production result of the predetermined production until the icon is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, when executing the specific display effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the icons to be displayed (combinations of the icons) at different rates according to the variable display result. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect. Therefore, the execution of the announcement effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes), and a reduction in the effect of the effect can be prevented. The effect control CPU 120 can also notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can make settings related to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered. In addition, when the effect-related setting is performed, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect-related setting has been changed (setting change notification). Therefore, the effect can be improved.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and can solve at least one problem in the related art by using the one described in the above-described embodiment. It may have a configuration of a unit. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, it has been described that the predetermined effect as the mini game always indicates success, but the effect of the predetermined effect may indicate failure. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the predetermined effect of the mode illustrated in FIG. 27 and the like is performed is described, but there may be a plurality of modes of the predetermined effect. For example, as illustrated in FIG. May compete (perform a race effect). FIG. 32 shows an example of an effect operation when a race effect is performed as a predetermined effect. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation of whether or not the predetermined effect is successful. The colors of each runner are blue, green, red, and rainbow, and the success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue, and the race performance is performed by two runner characters with different success expectation (here, , Is distinguished by the color), and if any one of them wins and the success or failure of the predetermined effect is notified (the winning runner's success expectancy is Reported as a jackpot expectation). Note that the race effect may be performed a plurality of times. Green and blue runners having a relatively low degree of expectation of success as a result of the predetermined effect belong to the first group, and rainbow and red runners having a relatively high degree of expectation of success as a result of the predetermined effect belong to the second group. Shall belong. Note that the race effect is an effect in which one of the runners is won, and is also a type of a selected effect in which the one runner is selected. Also, in a race effect, both appearing runners may stop the race (an aspect in which neither is selected).

  In this example, in a race effect in which at least one of a blue runner and a green runner belonging to the first group that has a relatively low degree of expectation of success of the predetermined effect appears, a ratio at which both runners stop the race (first stop ratio ), A race effect in which red runners and rainbow runners belonging to the second group that have a relatively high degree of expectation of success in the predetermined effect as shown in FIG. 32 (that is, blue or green colors belonging to the first group). The ratio (the second suspension ratio) in which both runners stop the race in a race effect in which no runner appears (second suspension ratio) is set higher. Accordingly, even when the degree of expectation of success of the predetermined effect is low, a race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In particular, usually, the ratio of "losing" is higher than the ratio of "variable hit" in the variable display result, and the rendering result as the predetermined rendering often ends in failure (in the case where the specific display rendering is performed). Also, the production result of the predetermined production often ends in failure) .Therefore, with the above configuration, the appearance rate of the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be increased, and the player Every time a race effect in which a runner and a rainbow runner appear appears, it is expected that the success expectation of the predetermined effect is high, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Conventionally, when a selection effect such as a race effect is performed (a race effect is a type of a selection effect, as described above), conventionally, when no option is selected from the presented options (runner colors) , A production with a high degree of expectation of success (high degree of expectation), which is not usually selected, was executed. However, as described above, usually, the variable display result is rarely a "big hit", and the effect as the predetermined effect often ends in failure. Therefore, the player comes into contact with the effect with the high degree of expectation. It is rare, and the effect is not enhanced. For this reason, a production that suggests a high degree of expectation (a red runner and a rainbow runner appear) based on the above-mentioned race production (production that includes a mode in which both runners stop) and the relationship between the first suspension ratio and the second suspension ratio The effect of the production is enhanced because it is easy to perform the production.

  In this example, as an example of the predetermined effect as a mini-game, an example in which the above-described race effect is executed and the degree of success expectation of the predetermined effect is reported is shown. However, the race effect is not a predetermined effect in the specific display effect. The effect of notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display being executed (an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree of the winning runner is notified as the present jackpot expectation degree) may be executed. According to this, even in the variable display in which the jackpot expectation is low, it is possible to execute a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group having a relatively high jackpot expectation appear, thereby reducing the effect of the effect. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which an icon as a special image is displayed as the specific display effect has been described. However, in addition to the icon being displayed as the specific display effect, as described above, the meter may be displayed as the specific display effect. An effect of changing the display (incremental increase) may be executed. Further, an effect of changing the mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display in accordance with the specific display effect (active display change effect) may be performed. Furthermore, at the time of the reach effect of super reach (super reach effect), the mode of the active display and the mode of the specific display may be changed to a special mode. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (for example, white) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)”, and “third mode ( (Red) ”. When the final display mode of the meter display as the specific display is “first stage” or “second stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “first mode (blue)” and the meter display is performed. In the case where the final display mode is “third stage” or “fourth stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “second mode (green)”, and the final display mode of the meter display is “10th phase”. In the case of “stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “third mode (red)”.

  FIG. 33 shows an active display change effect in which the specific display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first-stage display mode, and the active display changes to the first mode according to the change in the meter display. It shows an example of a rendering operation in the case of being performed. As shown in FIG. 33A, in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 33A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 33B, when the specific display effect is executed, an effect of blinking and displaying the meter display 90 as a predetermined effect is executed. Then, the character A200 appears (FIG. 33 (C)), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the first-stage display mode in which the color of one graduation out of 10 has changed (FIG. 33 (D)). Thereafter, in response to the change in the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 33E, the color is indicated by characters) and displayed (FIG. 33 (E)). E)).

  Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the specific display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Among them, FIG. 34 shows an example of an effect operation in a case where the super reach effect is executed alone (the specific display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 show an example of an effect operation in the case where the specific display effect and the active display change effect are executed when the super reach effect is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, a case where the super reach effect is executed alone will be described. As shown in FIG. 34A, in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 34A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the "left" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the "right" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (C), and the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. Is stopped and displayed in the same symbol (for example, symbol "7"), and a reach state occurs. Next, when it is time to develop into super reach, a character display such as "Super reach!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (D), and the race of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 34 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 34 (D) to (G), in this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It shall be.

  Next, when the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect is reached during the execution of the super reach effect, the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (F), on the image display device 5, a predetermined character image 201 different from the effect display of the racing car up to that time is cut in, and the words such as "Chance!" A predetermined cut-in effect is executed according to the displayed mode. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. Note that, for example, as in the above embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super reach effect. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a super cut effect is interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect is executed.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 34A, even when the super reach effect is executed alone, the display of the meter display 90 is started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. However, when a predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 90 is erased as shown in FIG. As described above, in this example, since the meter display 90 is displayed at least until the predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter that changes the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect and the specific display mode to the special mode is displayed. Until the execution timing of the special change of the display (which will be described in detail later), it is possible to prevent the user from recognizing whether the predetermined cut-in effect or the special change of the meter display is to be executed. Expectation can be given to the fact that a special change is made and the meter display changes. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and the meter display 90 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined cut-in effect is started (however, the level of the meter does not change). Further, for example, when the super reach effect is executed alone and the special change of the meter display or the active display change effect is not executed, the meter display 90 may not be displayed.

  Next, after the execution period of the predetermined cut-in effect has elapsed, the display returns to the racing effect display of the racing car again, and as shown in FIG. 34 (G), an effect as if the ally racing car finished first. Display. Then, after the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbol (for example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the “medium” decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is derived. Is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, a case where a special change of the meter display and an active display change effect are executed as the specific display effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described. In the examples of FIGS. 35 and 36, a special change of the meter display is executed as the specific display effect, and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the tenth-stage display mode. Then, the meter display and the active display change to the special display of the third special display mode. In the specific display effect, the display mode of the meter display normally changes to the first-stage display mode in which the color of one scale is changed as shown in FIG. 33 (D). When the special change of the meter display is executed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the display mode of the tenth stage. Thus, the special change of the meter display in the specific display effect is called a special change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, in the image display device 5, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 9F. In the example of FIG. 35A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the "left" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the "right" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (C), and "left" and "right" are displayed. Is displayed in a stopped state with the same symbol (for example, symbol "7"), and the reach state occurs. Next, when it is time to develop into super reach, a character display such as "Super reach!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (D), and the race of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 35 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 35 (D) to (I) and FIG. 36 (J), in this example, during the execution of the super reach effect and the execution of the special change effect, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. At the lower end, the fancy display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 35 (F), immediately before the specific display effect is started, an information effect in which the meter display 90 blinks is executed.

  Next, after the start of the super-reach effect, when the execution timing of the special change effect as the specific display effect comes, as shown in FIG. 35 (G), the super-reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (G), in the image display device 5, a special change effect is executed in a mode of performing an effect display as if a storm has arrived and thunder is sounding. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted to execute the special change effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (H), the image display device 5 performs an effect display on the meter display 90 as if a lightning strike was hit, and the display mode of the meter display as the specific display is 10 The display mode changes to the tenth-stage display mode in which the colors of all the scales have changed. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 35 (H), an example in which the color of all the scales is changed to the tenth-stage display mode is shown, but it is not necessary to change to the tenth-stage display mode at a stretch. For example, a super mini-reach effect is interrupted, or a special mini-game effect for changing the display mode is performed while executing the low-priority layer, and the stage changes to any stage according to the result of the mini-game effect. You may make it different. The display mode may be changed stepwise by continuously performing the mini-game effects.

  Next, the super reach effect is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 35 (I), the display returns to the effect display of the race of the racing car again, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the third mode (FIG. In the example of 35 (I), the color is indicated by characters). Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (J), an effect display is performed as if the ally racing car finished the first place, and the meter display and the active display are the special display (“V”) in the third special display mode. Is changed to the special display 202) showing the character Then, when the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 36 (K), the same symbol as the left and right effect symbols (for example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the “middle” decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is derived. Is displayed.

  In this example, an effect display of a racing car race is displayed as a super-reach effect, an effect display in which a predetermined character image 201 is cut in as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm arrives as a special change effect and lightning strikes. Although a case has been described where an effect display is performed as if the sound is ringing, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super-reach effect, a battle effect in which an enemy and an ally character perform a battle may be performed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effect modes are conceivable. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed as a predetermined cut-in effect, and any display that is different from the previous effect display during the super reach effect may be cut in any form. . Further, for example, as a special change effect, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect appears, or a button effect involving button operation may be executed, and various effect modes are conceivable.

  According to this, it is possible to display an indication (for example, a meter display) indicating the degree of expectation by changing the mode in a plurality of stages as the specific display. Further, when a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) is executed, a special change effect for changing the mode of the specific display (for example, a special change of the meter display in the specific display effect) can be executed. Further, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a mode having a higher priority than the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). Therefore, the mode of the specific display can be changed by a mode that has priority over the specific effect, so that even when the specific effect is executed, the change in the mode of the specific display can be noticed. That is, if both the specific effect and the change of the specific display mode are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and may not be able to sufficiently pay attention to the change of the specific display mode. Since the mode of the specific display can be changed according to the described mode, it is possible to pay attention to the change in the mode of the specific display even when the specific effect is executed. Also, in this example, while the effect of changing the meter display (incrementing stepwise) as the specific display effect is performed and the active display change effect is performed in accordance with the specific display effect, the active display change effect is described. Instead, the icon shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when the icons are displayed step by step, a special change of the meter display is executed as the specific display effect, and when the display form is changed from the normal form to the display form of the tenth step, the display form of the active display is changed to the third form. Instead of changing to the mode (in the example of FIG. 35 (I), the color is indicated by characters) and displaying the icon, the icon is displayed in the mode of the highest stage (the mode in which the big hit expectation is highest). You may.

  In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change in the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of one of the hold displays changes according to the change in the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the specific display effect (including the special change effect) based on the command at the time of the start winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the time of the start winning, and an effect is executed based on the determination result. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the display mode of any of the hold displays changes in response to the meter display, the specific display effect ( (Including a special change effect).

  Also, for example, the display mode of the hold display can be changed by a pre-reading effect. A display may be displayed. Specifically, when the suspended display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display). . Further, in this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the meter display, and the active display taking over the display mode of the hold display may change according to the further change of the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on the command at the time of the start winning, or may be determined in the variable display start setting process. Is also good. In this case, a specific display effect (including a special change effect) may be executable in a period from the time when the suspended display is displayed to the time when the corresponding variable display ends.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to make settings relating to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is to be displayed. However, the settings related to the effects are not limited to this. The setting relating to the effect may be performed on the basis of an operation performed by the player, and may be, for example, a selection of a music to be output or a type of background changed. The setting relating to the effect may include setting the function of the auto button to be enabled or disabled.

  Note that the “auto button” is a function of executing a process on the assumption that the push button 31B is operated, although the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player. In this example, the button announcement effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the announcement display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation or the continuous hit operation of the push button 31B in the button announcement effect. When the function is set to be valid, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the push button 31B is operated once or repeatedly in the button announcement effect, and the announcement display is displayed. . In this example, the single operation means that the push button 31B is operated once, and the continuous hitting operation means that the push button 31B is continuously operated a plurality of times.

  Further, in this embodiment, “auto-hit” means that the push button 31B is actually continuously depressed (long-pressed) by the player. This is a function of detecting that the button is continuously pressed (a state in which the button is repeatedly pressed (a state in which the push button 31B is pressed and a state in which the push button 31B is not pressed are repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, the notice display may be displayed based on the detection of the continuous operation of the push button 31B in the button notice effect, but the push button 31B is held down. Also in this case, a notice display is displayed on the assumption that the continuous hit operation has been detected.

  In this example, the effect setting process of step S78 in FIG. 14 is executed, so that an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which a customer waiting demonstration is displayed, a period during which a decorative pattern is variably displayed, a large hit game is played) During this period, it is possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player. For example, the example shown in FIG. 31 shows an example in which the volume setting has been changed by the player at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 25, but instead of the volume setting, the function of the auto button is enabled as an effect setting. Or invalidation can be set. That is, it is possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Note that it is also possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed. Note that, in this example, the function of the automatic continuous tapping is always valid, but it may be configured to enable or disable the function like the function of the auto button.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to valid or invalid. In FIG. 37, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In the case of FIG. 37A, it is assumed that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid. As shown in FIG. 37 (1), if the player performs a long press operation of the push button 31B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, as shown in FIG. 37 (2), the auto button Is set to be enabled, and a character string such as "Auto button enabled" is displayed on the image display device 5 to display that the function of the auto button is enabled. In addition, at this time, the control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R and the control for causing the push button 31B to emit light in a special light emission mode may be performed.

  In addition, when the player performs a pressing operation (single-shot operation) on the push button 31B while the auto button function is set to be valid, the auto button function is invalidated as shown in FIG. , And a character string such as “Auto button disabled” is displayed on the image display device 5 to display that the function of the auto button has been disabled. In addition, at this time, the control for outputting the auto button invalid sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R and the control for causing the push button 31B to emit light in the normal light emission mode may be performed.

  In the example of FIG. 37, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. However, by performing the same operation as described above, the setting is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can also be changed during a customer waiting demonstration period, a jackpot game period, or the like. Note that, for example, when the setting of the function of the auto button is changed from the menu screen, a display to the effect that the function of the auto button has been set to invalid or valid is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the example shown in FIG. Control to output the auto button invalid sound effect or the auto button valid sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, and to control the push button 31B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. You may.

  Next, a description will be given of a difference between a case where the automatic continuous hit is performed by the long press operation and a case where the automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation and the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function. In the example shown in FIG. 38, it is assumed that execution of the button announcement effect A has been determined as the button announcement effect.

  In the “button announcement effect A” and the “button announcement effect B”, when the operation effective period starts, a gauge display corresponding to the number of times the push button 31B is operated is displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is reduced by one. Then, when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and the advance notice is displayed (for example, “hot heat!” Or “chance!”). Is displayed.

  When the function of the auto button is invalid and the execution of the button announcement effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the execution of the button announcement effect, the long press operation is started. After 4 seconds have elapsed, the detection by the automatic continuous tapping is started, and during the detection by the automatic continuous tapping, the number of times the push button 31B is operated is increased by one every 1.0 second. In addition, when the execution of the button announcement effect B is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the execution of the button announcement effect, the automatic operation is performed when two seconds elapse after the start of the long press operation. Detection by repeated tapping is started, and during detection by automatic repeated tapping, the number of operations by the push button 31B is treated as increasing by one every 0.5 seconds. Regardless of which of the button announcement effect A and the button announcement effect B is executed, if a normal continuous tapping operation of the push button 31B is performed, every time a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected. The number of operations is treated as being increased by one.

  Further, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button announcement effect A is executed, 1.0 second elapses from the start of the operation validity period even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is not performed. Each time the operation is performed, the number of times the push button 31B is operated is increased by one. Also, when the button announcement effect B is executed, the number of operations by the push button 31B every time 0.5 seconds elapses from the start of the operation valid period even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is not performed. Treated as incremented by one. Although details will be described later, when the button announcement effect C is executed, even if the push button 31B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period is 6 seconds) , When the time reaches 3 seconds from the start of the operation validity period), it is treated as if the number of operations by the push button 31B has been performed once.

  It should be noted that, for example, the auto continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the auto continuous hit start time is determined to be 0 second at a rate of 50%, and is determined to be 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 70% and 2 seconds at a rate of 30%. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70%, and is determined to be 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, the time may be determined to be 0.5 second at a rate of 50%, and may be determined to be 1 second at a rate of 50%. In addition, for the configuration in which the auto continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period are selected from a plurality of options at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function and the long press operation May be applied to only one of the automatic hits, or to both.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 38A, in the case where the automatic continuous hit is performed by the long press operation, a predetermined start standby period is started after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation valid period. After a lapse of (for example, 4 seconds), the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the process is executed as if the continuous hit operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), when the automatic continuous tapping is performed by the auto button function, the continuous tapping determination is immediately turned on immediately after the start of the operation valid period (that is, the operation valid period is not determined). Immediately after the start, the process is executed as if the continuous hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, an effect (for example, a decrease in the scale of the gauge display) is provided when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. ) Can be performed at different times, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the execution of the button announcement effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit is performed by the long press operation, the long press operation of the push button 31B is performed after the start of the operation validity period. After a predetermined start standby period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the start, the continuous hit determination is turned on, and when the automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function, the continuous hit determination is performed immediately after the operation effective period starts. Turn on. Therefore, in both cases of the button announcement effects A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing at which (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is executed is configured to be different.

  In the above embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the description has been given assuming that the predetermined effect as the mini game always indicates success. However, the effect of the predetermined effect may indicate failure, and the execution of the predetermined effect may be performed. The rate at which the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success depends on the timing. Specifically, the execution timing of the predetermined effect is different depending on the execution timing of the specific display effect, and therefore, the ratio of the success of the effect of the predetermined effect indicating success depending on the execution timing of the specific display effect may be different. In addition, for example, even when the specific display effect is executed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 21, the execution timing of the predetermined effect may be a plurality of timings, and the execution timing of the predetermined effect May be different depending on the production result. According to this, the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect can be attracted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” differs according to the combination of the icons displayed as the specific display. However, this is an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect for changing the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display and a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display or the hold display is specified. The rate at which the variable display result is "big hit" may be different depending on the combination with the display mode of display (the number or combination of icons). According to this, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an icon as a specific display is displayed by determining a timing at which the execution period of the preview effect and the execution period of the specific display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the preview effect (the specific display is not performed). Change), an example in which the execution of the notice effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification is given is described. For example, although the notice effect is restricted, the big hit expectation of a single announcement is extremely high (here, , "Big hit" determination) special effects can be executed, and the special effects are not limited even during a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed (the specific display changes). Is also good. In this case, as for the execution timing of the special effect, for example, referring to a table in which the timing for overlapping with the execution period of the specific display effect is not selectable as shown in FIG. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by an operation of the player, in addition to the one-off notification. According to this, the effect which is limited and the effect which is not limited are sharpened, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the example in which the restriction of the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case of not performing (prohibiting) but also the case of executing the notice effect in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize is described. In, when the execution of the notice effect is performed without prohibition, if the icon display as the specific display is prioritized over the notice effect (the icon display layer is set to the player side over the notice effect layer, etc.) Good. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing the specific display, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the abnormality notification can be performed within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed is performed, but this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, information on the game, such as a hitting notification, a ball announcement, a fourth symbol, and the like may be appropriately notified as special notification. In addition, the ball announcement is to display the number of balls (acquired number of balls) acquired by the player in a recognizable manner, and the special announcement may be updated each time the number of acquired balls increases. Normally, the number of acquired payouts is displayed during a high base and is updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after the notification that an icon as a specific display is displayed is given. However, the payout due to the game ball winning the winning opening during the high base may be updated with the number of acquired payouts, which is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which the variable display result is frequently set to “small hits” during the high base to increase the number of obtained balls by the player. According to this, it is possible to update the acquired payout number even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the specific display is displayed, and it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the acquired payout number. . It should be noted that the hitting information may be any information such as a right-handed notification or a left-handed information that recognizablely displays the area in which the game ball is fired to the player. In addition, the fourth symbol may be anything that displays a variable display by blinking a lamp so as to be recognizable to the player.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time, a type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, one variation pattern command is issued when the variation is started. Although the transmission example has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is used to indicate the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after 2 stops) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control in the variable display may be performed on the effect control board 12 side based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing. Is also good. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. As described above, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of each segment not limited to the numbers and symbols are used. An example of variable display has been described. However, the variable display results and the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-". However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). The special symbol displayed during the variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a variable display of a special symbol, for example, a display in which "-" blinks is performed, and as a variable display result, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "losing", etc.) ) Is also included in the special symbol variable display. In addition, blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative symbol is also included in the variable display of decorative symbols. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and includes a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol). Alternate repetition is normally included in the variable display of symbols. Further, the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed as the variable display result.

  In the above embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio and the like; the same applies to the probability) and the like may include 0%. That is, the ratio and the probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, making one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, one ratio is, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is 100%. Including. Also, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio does not have to be 100% (there may be a certain ratio that is not included in either one or the other). Further, when the ratio of the other is set to be higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one of the ratios is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above description, the difference between the variable display pattern determination ratio in the specific period after the advantageous state and the variable display pattern determination ratio in other than the specific period is that the variable display pattern selected on one side is selected on the other side. This also includes cases in which the variable display pattern selected on the one hand and the variable display pattern selected on the other hand partially or completely do not overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the one that performs the probable change control in which the big hit type becomes “probable change” when the big hit design indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol. May be a pachinko gaming machine of a probability change judging device type in which a probability change control is performed based on a game ball passing through a specific area in an attacker provided in the game machine.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the rendering image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the gist of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a prize ball. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that gives a score or a gaming machine that controls a big hit gaming state when passing through a specific passage gate. Furthermore, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value (medal or the like), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be variably displayed. One game is completed by deriving the display result on the variable display device, and the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result derived on the variable display device.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. The distribution may be performed by pre-installing the storage device in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Other gaming machines of the present invention include gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1 and pachinko gaming machines 901) that can be controlled to advantageous states (for example, jackpot gaming states) that are advantageous to the player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing a specific display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) which can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed;
Abnormality notification execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing error notification processing shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification),
The abnormality notification execution means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification (for example, when the stop flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 60B and 62)
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when an icon as the specific display is displayed). The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the specific display is notified (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
A gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine, the gaming situation can be grasped even in a predetermined period after the display mode of the specific display has been notified, and a decrease in gaming interest can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

The gaming machine of the present invention is further a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for performing a specific display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) which can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed;
Abnormality notification execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing error notification processing shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification),
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification (for example, when the suppression flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 22 (B) and 24).
The specific display means changes the display mode of the specific display when a predetermined period elapses after being notified that the display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, when an icon as the specific display is displayed). The specific display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon is displayed (the specific display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the specific display is notified (for example, it is notified that the icon as the specific display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
A gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the game situation even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the specific display is notified, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, thereby preventing the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, from the point of grasping the gaming situation and preventing a decrease in gaming interest, even when a specific effect is being executed or when a new specific effect is executed, the abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification executing means. May be continuously executable. Furthermore, even if the predetermined effect is being executed during the execution of the specific effect, the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification executing means may be continuously executable. Furthermore, even if the execution of the predetermined effect by the changing unit is changed, the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification executing unit may be continuously executable.

  Further, in the gaming machine, the mode of the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification executing means may be changed based on the execution of the specific effect from the viewpoint of grasping the gaming situation and preventing a decrease in gaming interest. Further, when a new specific effect is executed, the mode of the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification executing means may change based on the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect. Further, the mode of the abnormality notification by the abnormality notification executing means may be changed by changing the presence or absence of the execution of the predetermined effect by the changing means.

  In the gaming machine, when the special notification and the abnormality notification are executed, they may be executed simultaneously or alternately. Further, only one of them may be preferentially executed. When the special notification and the abnormality notification are executed, the mode of the notification may be changed in order to make the player easily recognize both contents.

Further, as an example of a gaming machine that can prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, and prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the process of step S90634 shown in FIG. 54) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state;
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening winning process shown in FIG. 58) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a special winning opening winning effect or an effect when opening the special winning opening) during execution of the specific effect. And CPU 90120 for effect control for executing the effect processing at the time of opening the special winning opening shown in FIG.
Changing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52) which can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed;
Abnormality notification means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing error notification processing shown in FIG. 48) capable of executing abnormality notification (for example, ball drop error notification),
The abnormality notification unit can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification (for example, when the stop flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 60B and 62)
A gaming machine characterized by this. Hereinafter, an example of this gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, an example of another embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 39 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. The game board 902 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (to the right of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 39). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, an LED (light emitting diode) of a 7-segment or dot matrix, and identifies each of them in a special figure game which is an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information), are displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B each include a number indicating “0” to “9”, a symbol indicating “−”, or a lighting pattern of each segment that is not limited to the number or symbol. Variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of the same. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  A plurality of types of special symbols variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be provided with symbol numbers for identifying each of them. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of “-” is assigned “0” as a symbol number, and “1” to “9” may be assigned as symbol numbers for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 905, the first special symbol display device 904A in the special figure game corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure and the second special symbol display device 904B corresponds to the variable display of the second special figure. For example, in a decorative design display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, for example, three, a decorative design which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. Then, in the special figure game, in response to one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, In each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", the change of the decorative pattern (for example, scrolling in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game, the decoration symbol can be changed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas on the image display device 905. The final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) as a display result is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display apparatus 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display apparatus 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is identifiable, are variably displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern as a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derived"). Deriving and displaying various display symbols, such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol, means that the identification information of the decorative symbol and the like is stopped and displayed (also referred to as "complete stop display" or "final stop display") and the variable display is terminated. It is to let. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation and display of the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes “0” and the decorative symbol becomes “0”. The design may be stopped and displayed, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not steadily displayed, the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the decorative symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include, for example, completely displaying the decorative symbol for a shorter time than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a first hold display unit 905HR and a second hold display unit 905HL are arranged. The first reservation display unit 905HR displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure reserved storage number is the variable display reserved number corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second suspension display unit 905HL displays the second special figure suspension storage number in a identifiable manner. The second special figure reserved storage number is the variable display reserved number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning prize ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable prize ball device 906B. It is generated based on the start winning prize. That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, when the first start winning prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A (the first start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is 1 The addition (increment) is performed, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, the occurrence of the second start winning in which the game ball passes through (enters) the second start winning opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B (the second start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 The addition (increment) is performed, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. Is started, the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by one (decrement). If the first special figure reserved storage number has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first starting condition is not satisfied, and the first starting condition is based on the first winning. The special figure game may be invalidated, and only the payout of prize balls may be performed. Further, when the second start winning is generated, if the second special figure reserved storage number has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the second starting condition is not established. The special figure game may be invalidated, and only the payout of prize balls may be performed.

  In the first hold display unit 905HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display unit 905HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display reserved storage number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is particularly referred to as a total reserved storage number. When simply referred to as “the number of special figure reserved storages”, it generally refers to a concept including any of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. (The concept includes the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number, but excludes the total reserved storage number).

  A display for displaying the number of special figure reservation storages may be provided together with the first suspension display unit 905HR and the second suspension display unit 905HL, or instead of the first suspension display unit 905HR and the second suspension display unit 905HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 39, the number of special figure reservation storages can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the first reservation display portion 905HR and the second reservation display portion 905HL. A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B for displaying are provided. The first reservation display 9025A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The second reservation display 9025B displays the second special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first reservation display 9025A and the second reservation display 9025B each have a number (for example, four) corresponding to the upper limit (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure reservation storage number and the second special figure reservation storage number, respectively. ) LEDs.

  Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning port as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. An ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces which are changed between a closed state at a vertical position and an open state at a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) to form a second starting winning opening.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 906B, when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) To make it open. The normally variable winning prize ball device 906B is normally open when the solenoid 9081 is off, and the game ball can enter (pass) the second starting winning opening while the solenoid 9081 is on. You may comprise so that a game ball may not enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B has a first variable state such as an open state in which a game ball can pass (enter) or a magnified open state in which a game ball can pass through a second starting winning opening, and a game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is (for example, “4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first starting port switch 9022A, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second starting port switch 9022B May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may directly pay out a game ball that becomes a prize ball, or may give a score corresponding to the number of game balls that become a prize ball.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. To form a special winning opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the special winning opening (enters). ) In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes between an open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. I do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and for the player to obtain the winning ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 39), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is configured by a 7-segment or dot matrix LED or the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is variably displayed (variably displayed). Such a variable display of ordinary symbols is called an ordinary game (also referred to as a “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol hold display 9025C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on detection of a game ball that has entered any of the general prize holes by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a gaming effect lamp 909 is provided around the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal prize ball device 906A, the normal variable prize ball device 906B, the special variable prize ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hit ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, there is provided a lower plate that holds (retains) excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  For example, a stick button controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the center portion of the lower plate). ing. A controller sensor unit 9035A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting (detecting) a tilting operation (operation) on the operation rod may be provided in a lower portion of the stick button controller 9031A inside the main body of the lower plate.

  The member forming the upper plate can be operated by the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick button controller 9031A) on the near side on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A push button 9031B is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 40 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also has a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on a back surface of a game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. The main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory and a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays an image display device 905, speakers 908 L, 908 R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 controls all or part of the display operation on the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 909, decoration LED, and the like. And a function for determining the control content for causing a production electric component to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sounds from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. And a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for the purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command and control data from the effect control board 9012, a game effect lamp 909, a decoration LED, and the like. And a lamp driver circuit for driving the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

  As shown in FIG. 40, to the main board 9011, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a starting port switch (a first starting port switch 9022A and a second starting port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted. Wiring is connected. The various switches may have any configuration, such as a so-called “sensor”, that can detect a game ball as a game medium. Further, to the main board 9011, wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the ordinary symbol display device 9020, and the like is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). It is sufficient that the first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data is set to “0”.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a game control program and performing a control operation, and updating numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 90103 It is provided with a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an input / output port (I / O) 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90101, reads the fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes the variable data in the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the CPU 90103 reads the variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, the CPU 90103 sends the signal to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer included in the game control microcomputer 90100 only needs to include at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally provided.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random number value is indicated on a random counter provided in a predetermined area (a game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102. Numerical data may be stored, and the CPU 90103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly, so that the random number value is updated.

  The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 90101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In a RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 for performing a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 90122 for providing a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125 And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 90121, and thereby a process for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for effect is executed. At this time, effect control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from ROM 90121, fixed data read operation, effect control CPU 90120 writes variable data in RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and effect control CPU 90120 stores data in RAM 90122. A variation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control board 9012 includes a wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, a wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 9013, Wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick button controller 9031A has been detected is transmitted from the controller sensor unit 9035A to the wiring and the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation is renewably counted by, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. . The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 9012, numerical data indicating various random numbers for determining various effects, such as a random value for determining a stop symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect in variable display of a decorative symbol, can be counted. Is controlled.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 40, in addition to the effect control program, various kinds of table data used for controlling the effect operation are stored. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data forming a determination table, and pattern data configuring various effect control patterns. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and an end code. It is configured.

  Various data used for controlling the rendering operation are stored in the RAM 90122 mounted on the rendering control board 9012 shown in FIG. Specifically, the RAM 90122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, and a plurality of types that can be updated in response to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. Is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 90120. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs control for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the timing of switching the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing more generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a nonvolatile memory such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013 (sound effect signal), and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014 (Illumination signal) is output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle provided at the lower right of the front of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is fired toward a game area by a firing motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) a first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the game ball is turned by the first start port switch 9022A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. Thereafter, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the last special figure game or the big hit game state. Is done.

  Also, when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 9022B shown in FIG. Thus, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for game balls to pass through the second starting winning opening.

  Based on the detection of the game ball passing through the passage gate 9041 by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 40, the ordinary symbol starting condition for executing the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 9020 is satisfied. After that, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 starts the ordinary symbol game based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol starting condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol such as the end of the previous ordinary symbol game. In this ordinary symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the ordinary symbol is started, the fixed ordinary symbol which is a variable display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if the ordinary symbol other than the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “the ordinary symbol loss”. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, opening control and enlarging opening control are performed in which the movable wings of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 906B are at the tilting position. After a predetermined period of time, the closing control and the normal opening control that return to the vertical position are performed.

  When a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 904B is started, special It is determined (predetermined) whether or not to make the variable display result of the symbol a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before deriving and displaying the variable display result. Then, a variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 905 in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are also referred to as left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols, respectively. In a special figure game using the first special figure using the first special symbol display device 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure using the second special symbol display device 904B, a fixed special that results in a variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 905.

  When a predetermined big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol variable display result, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big hit” (specific display result), and the specific game state (advantageous) that is advantageous to the player State) is controlled to a jackpot game state. That is, whether or not to be controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As the variable display result of the special symbol, when the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes “losing” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 905. The determined decorative symbol to be the obtained big hit combination is derived and displayed. As an example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that a winning combination is determined. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening is opened, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in an advantageous state for the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the large winning opening to generate a winning ball. In the period up to this, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) in which the special winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During periods other than the round game execution period, the special winning opening is in a closed state, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”).

  The case where the variable display result is "big hit" may include a case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change". When the jackpot type becomes “unchangeable” or “changeable”, as a round game in the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to an advantageous state for the player (the jackpot opening state is opened). A normal opening round in which the time is relatively long (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. Note that the jackpot type may include a case where the jackpot type is “accurate”, and when the jackpot type becomes “a jackpot”, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is provided to the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A short-term opening round in which the upper limit of the advantageous state (the large winning opening is in the open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) may be executed.

  After the big hitting game state is ended, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to the probability changing state in which the variable display result becomes higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability changing control condition. There is. The certain probability change state is such that a certain probability change end condition is satisfied, such as a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) of variable display is executed, or a big hit game state is started before the number of times of variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it does. Note that the certain change end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit game state is started, regardless of the number of times of performing the variable display. After the big hitting game state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the time reduction state in which the average variable display time is shorter than the normal state. In the time reduction state, predetermined time reduction termination conditions are satisfied, such as a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display has been executed, or a big hit game state has been started before the number of times of variable display has reached the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it does. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes the time saving state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probable change”, after the big hit game state ends, the game state becomes the positive change state.

  In the positive change state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is set to the first variable state (open state or enlarged open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the control for making the normal symbol display time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game (ordinary symbol variation time) shorter than in the normal state, or the variable display result of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary symbol game is " A tilt control time period for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result has been set to “Regular hit”, as compared to the control for increasing the probability of “hit per figure” as compared to the normal state. The normal variable winning prize ball device 906B is changed between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by control to make the variable length longer than that in the normal state and control to increase the number of times of tilting than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control for changing the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change manner in this manner is referred to as “high opening control” (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is reduced, and the special state is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. In addition, even when the probable change control is performed in the probable change state, the high opening control may not be performed in some cases.

  In the image display device 905, a decorative symbol other than a symbol which is a final stop symbol (for example, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a middle symbol among the right symbols) is continuously stopped for a predetermined time and stopped in a state where the symbol matches the big hit combination. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to swinging, scaling or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position is switched, etc. An effect performed in a state where sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design is displayed. An effect operation different from changing the variation of the decorative symbol, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R and the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909 are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is not a big hit combination, the result is "losing" and the variable display state ends.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") differs depending on the effect mode in each reach effect. That is, the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach effect (normal reach) and a super reach effect (super reach) are set in advance. Then, when the reach effect in super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit expectation) is higher than when the reach effect in normal reach is executed. It should be noted that the reach effect to be a super reach may include a plurality of types of reach effects including a super reach for executing a specific reach effect with a higher jackpot expectation degree than other super reachs. In the present embodiment, as an example, the reach production that becomes super reach includes reach productions such as super reach A ', super reach B', and super reach C '. Super Reach C 'has become a hit production with a higher expectation of big hits than Reach B'.

  During the variable display of a decorative pattern, unlike a variable display effect such as a reach effect or a “pseudo ream”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or a decorative image such as an image display or voice output as a message is displayed. By the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, it is possible that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, there is a possibility that the reach effect by super reach may be executed, the variable display result is An announcement effect for notifying a player in advance that there is a possibility of a “big hit” may be executed.

  The effect operation that is a notice effect is performed in such a manner that after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is started. May be executed (started) prior to the reaching of the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R). In addition, the announcement effect that notifies that the variable display result is likely to be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. As described above, the notice effect can be set to the jackpot game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the fixed special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. What is necessary is just to be able to foresee sex. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such an effect effect is performed.

  When the lost symbol is stop-displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is “loss,” the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal And the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss"). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and a predetermined decorative pattern combination (non (Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is "reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not required is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbol constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol which is a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, in the big hit game state, for example, a prize sound (a normal prize sound, an over prize sound) for notifying that a game ball has won a big prize mouth is output, and the remaining prize number in the round game is indicated. A special effect such as a special winning opening prize production effect for displaying the remaining winning number display or a special winning opening opening effect for outputting a special winning opening opening sound for notifying that the special winning opening has been opened is set to be executable. I have. Then, in the big hit game state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed by detecting a player's specific operation such as prolonged pulling of the stick button controller 9031A toward the front for a predetermined time. . For example, from the mode in which the predetermined effect can be executed (the normal mode to be described later), the player cannot continuously execute the predetermined effect by pulling the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds (the stop mode described later). Execution mode) or a mode in which the predetermined effect is suppressed by the player pulling the stick button controller 9031A continuously for 2 seconds (execution mode during suppression described later). The execution mode of the predetermined effect is the presence or absence of the execution of the predetermined effect, or the effect mode of the predetermined effect when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, volume output level, brightness level, display size, display transparency, display color, Sound quality). Note that, in this embodiment, in the big hit game state, unlike the predetermined effect, for example, the music selected by the operation of the player or the like and the moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) and MV (Music Video) of the music It is set to be able to execute a specific effect such as the reproduction of a sound.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90101 is cleared. Further, a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. When the initialization is completed, an interrupt is permitted, and then a loop process is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process sets an interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol processing, ordinary symbol processing, and command control processing in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of a detection signal input from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and, if necessary, generating a warning according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of the plurality of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  As an example, the random numbers for gaming used on the side of the main substrate 9011 include a random number MR′1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number MR′2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern. It is sufficient that MR'3 and the random number value MR'5 for determining the general-purpose display result are included. The random number value MR'1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game to the "big hit" and to control the big hit game state. The random number value MR′2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, such as “non-probable” or “probable” when the variable display result is “big hit”. This is the random value used. The random value MR'3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number value MR'5 for determining the ordinary figure display result is a state in which the variable display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game is set as "per ordinary figure" and the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B is closed ( This is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control an open state (expanded open state) in which game balls can easily pass (enter) at a higher frequency than in a normally open state.

  In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and displayed on the special symbol display device 904. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 9020 to change the variable display of the normal symbol and to set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Is a process that enables In the normal symbol process process, as a high opening control accompanying the time saving control, a control for shortening the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 than in the normal state, A control for improving the probability that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "per-figure" in the ordinary figure game as compared with the normal state, and a normal variable winning prize ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure" Part or all of the control of making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable wing piece in 906B longer than in the normal state and the control of increasing the number of times of tilt than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control board 9012 is output to the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After the control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit an effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102. Run.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90101 in FIG. 41 as the start winning determination processing. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the CPU 90103 first detects a starting winning switch based on a detection signal from a first starting port switch 9022A provided corresponding to a first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. It is determined whether the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first starting port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved figure number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is equal to a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, “4”) is determined (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the first reserved storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, and thereby stores the first special figure reserved. It is sufficient if the number of storages can be specified. If the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), the starting port which is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S90203).

  When the first starting port switch 9022A is turned off in step S90201 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 9022B is ON based on a detection signal from the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second starting port switch 9022B is on (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved figure number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is equal to the predetermined upper limit value. (For example, “4”) is determined (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the second reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, thereby obtaining the second special figure reservation. It is sufficient if the number of storages can be specified. If the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), the starting port buffer value is set to “2” (step S90206).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the count value of the number of pending storages corresponding to the starting port buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is added by one, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is added by one. In this manner, the first reserved storage number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to be incremented. In addition, the second reserved stored number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to be incremented. In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to increase by one, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to increase by one. . At this time, the count value of the total reserved storage number, which is the storage value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the predetermined area (eg, the game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102, is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90208).

  After executing the processing of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, random number for updating the special figure display result is selected from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 or a random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90102. Numerical data indicating a numerical value MR'1, a random number value MR'2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR'3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each of the random numbers thus extracted is stored as the reserved data at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reserved storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S90210).

  In the process of step S90210, for example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure holding storage unit, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, The data is set in the second special figure holding storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (not yet started) although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the first starting winning has been generated. A special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored as a hold storage. The second special figure reservation storage unit stores a special start game in which a game ball has passed (entered) a second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B and a second starting prize has occurred, but has not yet started. (A special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure holding storage unit associates, for example, the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) with the first start winning opening with the hold number and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passage (entering) of the game ball. The CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR′1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR′2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 90104 and the like. The pending data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The second special figure holding storage unit associates, for example, the order of winning in the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting game balls) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entering) of the game ball. The CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR′1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR′2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR′3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 90104 and the like. The pending data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  Subsequent to the process of step S90210, a setting is made to transmit a prepared start opening winning designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S90211). After that, a setting for transmitting a reserved storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90213). Further, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90214). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S90214; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90215), and then the starting winning is achieved. The determination processing ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S90214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S90216). Proceed to step S90204. As a result, even when both the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B simultaneously detect a valid winning start of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting port switch 9022A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the steps shown in FIG. 42 are performed. When it is determined in the process of S90202 that the first special figure reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S90203 shown in FIG. 42, and then the transmission setting is performed in the process of step S90211. A first starting port winning designation command is transmitted to 9012. In addition, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S90213 shown in FIG. 42, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Is done.

  FIG. 42 shows a state in which a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting port switch 9022B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. When it is determined in the process of step S90205 that the second special figure reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second starting condition is a condition for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "2" in the process of step S90206 shown in FIG. A second start-up opening winning designation command is transmitted to 9012. In addition, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the transmission setting by the process of step S90213 shown in FIG. 42 is performed, so that the main board 9011 transmits the second suspended storage number notification command to the effect control board 9012. Is done.

  On the side of the effect control board 9012, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition is detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. it can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The second starting port winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the second starting condition is satisfied. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used to determine whether the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the starting winning is determined. This is notified as well as being sent as hold notification information for specifying which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has increased.

  The first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command correspond to, for example, starting the execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Alternatively, it may be transmitted. Alternatively, when the reserved storage number increases, the reserved storage number addition designation command (the first reserved storage number addition designation command or the second reserved figure addition designation command) indicating that the first special figure reserved storage number or the second special figure reserved storage number has increased. While transmitting the reserved storage number addition designating command, when the reserved storage number decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the second special figure reserved storage number) indicating that the first special figure reserved storage number or the second special figure reserved storage number has decreased. A command for specifying the number of 1-reserved storage number subtraction or the command for specifying a second reserved-storage number subtraction) may be transmitted. A total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, or together with the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command. May be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The special symbol normal process of step S90110 shown in FIG. 41 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A, the first special symbol display device 904A, It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B. In the special symbol normal process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR'1 for determining the special symbol display result, it is variably displayed whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit". It is determined (predetermined) before the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. Data indicating the result of the determination of the jackpot type is stored in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102, so that the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol, Loss symbol is set). In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set in advance in accordance with the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, by determining the variation pattern at a predetermined ratio when the variable display result is “losing” in the variation pattern setting process, whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” is determined. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 904. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol changing process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process of setting a special symbol to be changed on the special symbol display device 904, a process of measuring an elapsed time since the change of the special symbol, and the like. . Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the change of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 904 and stopping and displaying the fixed special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the result of the special figure display being "big hit" is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to " Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting the round game in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit". It is included. When the big hit opening pre-process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of round games in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”) or the upper limit. If not, a process of waiting until the next round game is started is included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “7”. Is updated to ".

  The big hit end processing in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, and a process of performing various settings for controlling to a probable change state or a time saving state according to whether the probable change control condition is satisfied. Then, when a setting for controlling to the probable change state or the time saving state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 41 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 43, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 only needs to read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

  If the second special figure reserved storage number is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; No), it is stored in the first area (the storage area corresponding to the reserved number “1”) of the second special figure reserved storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number is read as the held data (step S90232). Thereby, the random number for game extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (the second starting winning) in the second starting winning opening in the process of step S90209 shown in FIG. 42 is read. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved figure storage count, for example, by updating the second reserved figure storage count, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The content stored in the section is shifted (step S90233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward by one entry at a time. shift. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the total pending storage number may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102, is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved storage number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure starts to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  Regardless of whether the game ball is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls pass (enter) the starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is associated with the holding data together with the holding data or separately from the holding data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. May be stored, and the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied may be specified for the special figure game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting the first reserved figure count value by 1, and the like, and the first special figure reserved storage number is reduced by one. The content stored in the section is shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward by one entry. shift. In addition, in the process of step S90237, the total reserved storage number may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining a special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR'1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "losing". It is only necessary that the result be assigned. The CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR′1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. Good.

  In the process of step S90239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probable change state and the probable change control is being performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probable change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The display result is determined to be "big hit". The probable change state is started, for example, by setting the probable change flag to the ON state in response to the case where the big hit type is “probable” by the big hit end processing in step S90117 shown in FIG. When in the probable change state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and a big hit gaming state than when the probable change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

  The CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is “big hit” (step S90240). If the special map display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90102 is set to an on state (step S90241). . The big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 in advance or the like is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number for determining the jackpot type depends on whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. What is necessary is just to be assigned to the result of determining which of the types. The CPU 90103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR'2 for determining the jackpot type read from the random number buffer for fluctuation.

  After executing the processing of step S90242, the type of big hit is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the jackpot type determination result in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (eg, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 90102.

  If the special figure display result is not "big hit" in step S90240 (step S90240; No), or after executing the processing of step S90243, a fixed special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a fixed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the result of the determination of the big hit type in step S90242. What is necessary is just to determine a fixed special symbol.

  After executing the processing of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S90245), and the special special pattern normal processing ends. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S90245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S90111 shown in FIG. 41 is executed.

  If the reserved number of special figure games using the first special figure is “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S90246), and then the special symbol is set. The normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is sent from the main board 9011 to the effect control. It is determined whether or not the data has been transmitted to the substrate 9012. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo display setting ends. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting ends.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90111 in FIG. 41 as a variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit at which the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S90262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S90261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to a loss when the special figure display result is “loss” is determined (step S90263).

  In the process of step S90262, the change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using the big hit change pattern determination table prepared by, for example, storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR'3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR′3 read from the variation random number buffer, and determines whether the variable display result is “big hit”. A corresponding variation pattern may be determined. In the process of step S90263, the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by, for example, storing the information in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR'3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 90103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation random number MR′3 for determining the variation pattern read from the variation random number buffer, so that the variable display result becomes “losing”. A corresponding variation pattern may be determined.

  FIG. 45 shows a fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is “losing”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not enter the reach state, and “the reach state becomes“ non-reach ””. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and corresponding to the case where the variable display result (the special figure display result) is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is , A reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 46 shows an example of determining a jackpot variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 44, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 46A, the fluctuation pattern PA'3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB'3-1 to PB'3-3 are used as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit at the ratio shown in FIG. Determined by the pattern. In the process of step S90263 shown in FIG. 44, when the time saving control is not performed in the normal time (non-time saving time), for example, the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined at the rate shown in FIG. You. In the process of step S90263 shown in FIG. 44, when the time saving control is being performed, the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 46 (B2), for example. In the process of step S90263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, if the variable display result is "losing", it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is to be the reach state. It should be noted that it may be determined by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern whether or not the reach state is set when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (A), the determined values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach, such as the fluctuation patterns PB'3-1 to PB'3-3, are the fluctuation patterns PA'3- For example, the number is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as 1. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 46 (B1) and FIG. 46 (B2), the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PA′2-1, is the fluctuation pattern PB′2. -1 to PB'2-3 are set so as to be larger than the determined values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanying the reach effect in the super reach. Thereby, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result is a “big hit” (big hit expectation) is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 46 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different fluctuation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “159” to “205” is assigned to the variation pattern PA′1-1 if the first special figure reserved storage number is 0, and the first special figure reserved storage number Is 1, it is assigned to the variation pattern PA'1-2, and if the first special figure reserved storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the variation pattern PA'1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the first special figure holding storage. In particular, the average variable display time is shortened when the number of first special figure reservation storages is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “2”) than when the first number of special figure reservation storages is less than the predetermined value. It is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the following can be performed. At normal times when the time saving control is not performed, the game ball is unlikely to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as the above. Alternatively, irrespective of the second special figure reserved storage number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number at that time. , A variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data to which a determination value is assigned differently from B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved storage number” shown in FIG. 46 (B1) is replaced with the “second special figure reserved storage number”, The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 46 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different fluctuation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol can be varied according to the number of the second special symbol reservation storages. In particular, the average variable display time is shortened when the number of second special figure reservation storages is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “2”) than when the second number of special figure reservation storages is less than the predetermined value. It is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the following can be performed. During the time savings in which the time saving control is performed, the game ball easily passes through (enters) the second starting winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeatedly performed during the time reduction. It is highly likely to be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as the above. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from that in FIG. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved storage number” shown in FIG. 46 (B2) is replaced with the “first special figure reserved storage number”, The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes of steps S90262 and S90263, a special figure variable time which is a variable display time of a special symbol is set (step S90264). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (the special figure display result). It is. As shown in FIG. 45, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S90262 and S90263. The CPU 90103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90264, the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A and the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B are started. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start any special figure game in which the condition is satisfied (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designating buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S90265, the command transmission setting at the start of the change of the special symbol is performed (step S90266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification commands, the storage address (head address) of the prepared first variation start command table in the ROM 90101 is specified. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 transmits the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification commands, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first change start command and the second change start command use a change start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and a second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of change in the special figure game. The change pattern designation command is variably displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 905 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a production control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S90267), and the variation pattern setting process ends. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation processing in step S90112 shown in FIG. 41 is executed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated, and executes the effect control main process illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, when the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9051), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board. The register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the 9012 is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9052). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control signal serving as an effect control command is sent from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among input ports included in the I / O 90125. Take in. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122, for example. Thereafter, effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9052; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and a command analysis process is executed (step S9054). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a received command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, it is determined which effect control command has been received by checking the MODE data of the received command.

  Following the command analysis processing, an error notification processing (step S9055) is executed. In the error notification process, for example, under the control of the effect control CPU 90120, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 905, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Output.

  Subsequent to the error notifying process, an effect control process process is executed (step S9056). In the effect control process processing, various operations such as a display operation of an effect image on a screen of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation of a game effect lamp 909, and a light emitting body such as a decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like. Following the effect control process process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S9057), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random numbers used for the effect control is generated by software. Update. After execution of the effect random number update process, the process returns to step S9052.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S9055 of FIG. 47 as error notification processing. In this error notification process, effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a ball-drop error notification start command has been received (step S90301). The ball drop error notification start command may be transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 assuming that a ball drop error has occurred when the lower plate is full of game balls, for example. If it is determined in step S90301 that a ball-drop error notification start command has been received (step S90301; Yes), the stop flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is in the ON state. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S90302). When it is determined in step S90302 that the stop flag is in the off state (step S90302; No), it is determined whether the suppression flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is in the on state. Is determined (step S90303). In the initial state, the stop flag and the suppression flag are off, and the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag is switched in a specific operation detection process in step S90162 described later.

  If the stop flag is determined to be on in step S90302 (step S90302; Yes), or if the suppression flag is determined to be on in step S90303 (step S90303; Yes), the ball The setting for starting the display of the error with the reduced size is performed (step S90304). Note that the ball drop error display may be performed, for example, by displaying a ball drop error display image on the image display device 905. By executing the processing of step S90304, a ball-drop error display is performed on the image display device 905 in a reduced size. If it is determined in step S90303 that the suppression flag is in the off state (step S90303; No), a setting for starting the ball-drop error display with the normal size is performed (step S90305). By executing the processing in step S90305, the ball display error display is performed in the normal size on the image display device 905. That is, when either the stop flag or the suppression flag is in the on state, the ball removal error display is performed in a reduced size, and when both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state, the ball An error display is performed at the normal size. When the ball-drop error display is started with the reduced size, the reduced-size flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is turned on, and the ball-drop error display is started with the normal size. In this case, the normal size flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) may be turned on.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the stop flag is determined to be on in step S90302 (step S90302; Yes), or when the suppression flag is determined to be on in step S90303 (Step S90303; Yes), setting is made to start the ball-drop error display at the reduced size (Step S90304). That is, when the stop flag is ON and when the suppression flag is ON, the ball-drop error display is performed in the reduced size that is the same size. However, the display size of the ball-drop error display may be different between when the stop flag is on and when the suppression flag is on. For example, when the stop flag is on, a ball-drop error display is performed at the first reduced size of the reduced sizes, and when the suppression flag is on, the size is larger than the first reduced size of the reduced sizes. A ball-drop error display may be performed at the second reduced size. Note that when the stop flag is on, a ball-drop error display may be performed at the second reduced size, and when the suppression flag is on, a ball-drop error display may be performed at the first reduced size. By doing so, the display size of the error display can be changed according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect.

  Then, after executing the processing of steps S90304 and S90305, a setting for starting the output of the ball drop error notification sound is performed (step S90306). In this embodiment, when a ball drop error occurs, a ball drop error notification sound is output at a common volume output level regardless of the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. Note that the volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound may be made different depending on the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. For example, when either the stop flag or the suppression flag is in the on state, the ball-drop error notification sound is output at a small volume output level, and both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state. In such a case, the ball drop error notification sound may be output at a normal volume output level. Further, when the stop flag is on, a ball-drop error notification sound is output at the first volume output level of the small volume output levels, and when the suppression flag is on, the first volume of the small volume output level is output. The ball-drop error notification sound may be output at a second volume output level that is higher than the output level. In addition, when the stop flag is on, the ball-drop error notification sound may be output at the second volume output level, and when the suppression flag is on, the ball-drop error notification sound may be output at the first volume output level. . In this way, the output level of the error display sound can be changed according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect. It should be noted that the ball drop error display and the output of the ball drop error notification sound are simply referred to as “ball drop error notification”.

  If it is determined in step S90301 that no ball drop error notification start command has been received (step S90301; No), it is determined whether a ball drop error notification end command has been received (step S90311). The ball drop error notification end command may be transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 when the lower plate is no longer full of game balls, that is, when the ball drop error is eliminated. If it is determined in step S90311 that a ball-drop error notification end command has been received (step S90311; Yes), settings are made to end the ball-drop error display (step S90312). In step S90312, the ball-drop error display performed on the image display device 905 ends, and the reduced size flag and the normal size flag are turned off. After the processing of step S90312, the setting for terminating the output of the ball drop error notification sound is performed (step S90313), and then the error notification processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S90311 that no ball-drop error notification end command has been received (step S90311; No), it is determined whether or not the ball-drop error display is being performed after the process in step S90306 has been performed. (Step S90321). If it is determined in step S90321 that the ball removal error display is being executed (step S90321; Yes), it is determined whether the stop flag is in the ON state (step S90322). If it is determined in step S90322 that the stop flag is not in the on state (step S90322; No), it is determined whether the suppression flag is in the on state (step S90323).

  If it is determined in step S90322 that the stop flag is on (step S90322; Yes), or if it is determined that the suppression flag is on in step S90323 (step S90323; Yes), the normal operation is performed. It is determined whether or not the size is displayed, that is, whether or not the ball removal error is displayed in the normal size (step S90324). In step S90324, when the normal size flag is on, it may be determined that the image is displayed in the normal size. If it is determined in step S90324 that the image is displayed in the normal size (step S90324; Yes), the display size of the ball-drop error display is switched from the normal size to the reduced size (step S90325). In step S90325, the normal size flag is turned off, and the reduced size flag is turned on.

  If it is determined in step S90323 that the suppression flag is in the OFF state (step S90323; No), it is determined whether or not the display is performed in the reduced size, that is, whether the ball-drop error display is performed in the reduced size. A determination is made (step S90326). In step S90326, it may be determined that the image is displayed in the reduced size when the reduced size flag is on. When it is determined in step S90326 that the image is displayed in the reduced size (step S90326; Yes), the display size of the ball-drop error display is switched from the reduced size to the normal size (step S90327). In step S90327, the normal size flag is turned on, and the reduced size flag is turned off.

  After executing the processing of steps S90325 and S90327, or when it is determined in step S90324 that the image is not displayed in the normal size (displayed in reduced size) (step S90324; No), the reduced size is determined in step S90326. Is determined to be not displayed (displayed in the normal size) (step S90326; No), and when it is determined in step S90321 that the ball-drop error display is not being executed (step S90321; No). ), Since other error notification processing has been executed (step S90331), the error notification processing ends.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the volume status display process (step S90161), the specific action detection process (step S90162), and the song determination process during the big hit (step S90163). One of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90176 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit).

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is to perform variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start, and the like. When the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting processing is performed on the screen of the image display device 905 in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols and other various effecting operations, the processing includes determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns in accordance with a variation pattern of special symbols, a type of display result, and the like. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (such as an effect control timer setting unit) by using various control data from the effect control pattern. For performing various effect control during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the final decoration symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed. (Derived display). In addition, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the fixed decorative symbol may be completely stopped and displayed (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has passed, the effect control board 9012 side autonomously operates without relying on the effect control command from the main board 9011. The derived decorative symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display result can be determined. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop processing starts the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the result of determining whether or not the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not to be performed. When the big hit game state is started in response to the variable display result corresponding to "big hit", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the variable display result corresponds to "losing". If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  The big hit display process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The big hit display process includes a process for executing a big hit notification effect (fan fare effect) for notifying the start of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit production process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “5”. In the big hit production process, the production control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production content in the big hit game state, and displays a production image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 905. Also, a command (effect sound signal) is output to the voice control board 9013 to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909 or decoration is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the big hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the use LED, is executed. In addition, in the big hit production process, the value of the production control process flag is updated to "6" in response to, for example, receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  The big hit end rendering process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “6”. In the big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 905. Also, a command (effect sound signal) is output to the voice control board 9013 to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909 or decoration is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the use LED at the end of the big hit game state are executed. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  In the volume state display process of step S90161, for example, the player operates the stick button controller 9031A or the like in a game state other than the super-reach effect or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error (first state). Irrespective of the presence / absence of the presence / absence, a process for visually displaying a volume status display image indicating the volume output level on the display screen of the image display device 905 is included. Also, for example, it includes a process for changing (adjusting) the volume output level in accordance with the player's operation such as a leftward or rightward operation of the stick button controller 9031A by the player.

  FIGS. 50 and 51 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the sound volume state display processing. In the sound volume state display process shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, first, effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a super-reach effect is being performed (step S90601). In the process of step S90601, for example, it may be determined whether or not the change (change in which the start condition is satisfied) is a change due to the super reach change pattern, and whether the change is a reach effect period.

  If it is determined in step S90601 that the super-reach effect is not being performed (step S90601; No), it is determined whether the super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S90602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick button controller 9031A during the super reach effect. Data indicating the ON state or the OFF state of the super-reach operation flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122.

  If the super reach operation flag is not set to the ON state in step S90602 (step S90602; No), display control for displaying a volume status display on the image display device 905 is executed (step S90603). As a result, a volume status display image indicating the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 905 as the volume status display. For example, as shown in FIG. 61, the sound volume status display image has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and in that image display section, a portion corresponding to the current volume (FIG. 61 ( In A), the image is displayed in the form of lighting from the left end for three).

More specifically, when the volume output level is the lowest level (the volume output level is a level that is lower than normal and not a mute level), image display is performed in such a manner that all five image display sections are turned off. . Note that the lowest level may be the mute level. In the case of the first level which is one level higher than the lowest level, the image display is such that the leftmost image display section is turned on. In the case of the second level, which is one level larger than the first level, the image display is such that the two image display sections from the left end are turned on. In the case of the third level (the volume output level is a normal level, that is, a normal level) which is one level higher than the second level, the image display is such that the three image display sections from the left end are turned on. In the case of the fourth level, which is one level larger than the third level, the image display is such that the four image display sections from the left end are turned on. In the case of the fifth level (the highest level), which is one level higher than the fourth level, the image display is such that all five image display sections are turned on. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, although the volume status display image is set to the meter type of display aspect, the present invention is not limited to this, or the display mode of the equation due to the numbers or numeric, color type of display mode (for example, blue → (A display that changes in the order of green → yellow → red, indicating that the color becomes larger as the color becomes redder).

  If the super reach operation flag has been set (ON state) in step S90602 (step S90602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image) on the image display device 905 is performed. The process is executed (step S90604), and the super reach operation flag is reset to an off state (step S90605). Steps S90604 and S90605 are processes for continuing the sound volume status display when the sound volume changing operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect. As a result, the volume status display image displayed by performing a volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect, and is deleted once at the end timing of the super reach effect. Can be prevented.

  After executing the processing of step S90603 or after executing the processing of step S90605, it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S90606). If there is a volume change operation (step S90606; Yes), a changed volume status display (display of a changed volume status display image) and a changed volume setting are executed (step S90607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player has operated the stick button controller 9031A (for example, leftward or rightward) (step S90606; Yes), the image display device 905 displays Display control for displaying the changed volume status display image is executed, the changed volume set value is stored in the RAM 90122, and the sound and the sound effect are output from the speakers 908L and 908R at the changed volume output level. Then, the changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 9013 is executed (step S90607).

  For example, the stick button controller 9031A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick button controller 9031A once to the right, the lighted state of the image display section is increased by one and the changed volume state display image is displayed. Is displayed on the image display device 905, and the volume output level is increased by one. Conversely, when the player operates the stick button controller 9031A once to the left, the changed volume status display image in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 905 and , The volume output level is reduced by one.

  After executing the processing of step S90607, the operation flag other than super reach is set to the on state (step S90608). In this manner, the non-super-reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick button controller 9031A during a period other than the super-reach effect. The data indicating the ON state or the OFF state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122.

  On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S90606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the on state (step S90609).

  After executing the processing of step S90608, or when the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state in step S90609 (step S90609; Yes), a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S90610). If a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S90610; Yes), the operation flag is reset to the off state except for the super reach mode (step S90611). Note that the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be performed until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the first operation, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, the operation is performed from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined period is set after the operation, but may be set until the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the display of the volume status display image.

  Returning to step S90601, if the super reach effect is being produced (step S90601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the on state (step S90701). If the operation flag other than the super reach is set to the ON state (step S90701; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S90702). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S90702; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step S90703).

  If there is a volume change operation (step S90703; Yes), a post-change volume status display (display of a post-change volume status display image) and post-change volume setting are executed (step S90704). In this step S90704, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player has operated the stick button controller 9031A (for example, to the left or right), the changed volume state display image is displayed on the image display device 905. The display control to be displayed is executed, the changed volume set value is stored in the RAM 90122, and the voice control board 9013 is controlled so that sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 908L and 908R at the changed volume output level. Then, the volume setting after the change is executed (step S90704).

  On the other hand, if a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S90702; Yes), a volume status display erasing process for deleting the volume status display image displayed on the image display device 905 is executed (step S90705). The operation flag is reset to the off state when the vehicle is not in the reach mode (step S90706).

  When the operation flag other than super reach is off in step S90701 (step S90701; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S90703 (step S90703; No), or after the processing of steps S90704 and S90706 is performed Determines whether the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S90707). If the super reach operation flag is off in step S90707 (step S90707; No), a process of deleting the volume status display is executed (step S90707a). The process of step S90707a is a process for not displaying the sound volume status during the super reach effect in principle. Specifically, in the second state in which the super-reach effect is executed, that is, in the game state in which the super-reach effect is being performed, the volume state display image is not displayed on the image display device 905 unless requested by the player (the volume state). Display image is erased). This makes it possible to prevent the volume status display image from being displayed during the execution of the super reach effect, which is an example of a game effect (an effect including an important notice, etc.) that the player particularly wants to show. Reduction can be suppressed.

  After executing the processing of step S90707a, it is determined whether or not an operation start for volume change has been accepted (step S90708). If the operation start is accepted in step S90708 (step S90708; Yes), that is, if the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player has operated the stick button controller 9031A leftward or rightward, the image display is performed. A display control for displaying a volume status display image indicating the current volume output level on the device 905 is executed (step S90709). Then, the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S90710).

  If the super reach operation flag is ON in step S90707 (step S90707; Yes), or after executing the processing in step S90710, it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (for example, 3 seconds). Step S90711). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S90711; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S90712). If there is a volume change operation (step S90712; Yes), display of the changed volume status display image and setting of the changed volume are executed (step S90713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 9035A detects that the player has operated the stick button controller 9031A in the left or right direction (step S90712; Yes), the left or right direction of the stick button controller 9031A is detected. Display control after displaying the changed volume status display image according to the number of operations on the image display device 905, and store the changed volume set value according to the number of operations in the RAM 90122, and the speaker 908L, The changed sound volume setting such as controlling the sound control board 9013 so that the sound and the sound effect are output at the changed sound volume output level from 908R (step S90713).

  If the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation in step S90711 (step S90711; Yes), a process of deleting the volume status display is executed (step S90714). As described above, during the super-reach production, the volume status display image is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation, and when the super-reach production is still in progress when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display image is displayed. Is erased. After executing the process of step S90714, the super reach operation flag is reset to an off state (step S90715).

  If no operation start is received in step S90708 (step S90708; No) or if there is no volume change operation in step S90712 (step S90712; No), the volume status display is performed after the processes in steps S90713 and S90715 are executed. The processing ends.

  The specific operation detection process in step S90162 is performed, for example, in response to detecting a specific operation of the player such as a long operation (lever pull) of the stick button controller 9031A by the player in a big hit game state (during a big hit). This includes a process for changing the presence / absence of a predetermined effect such as a special winning opening prize effect and an effect when the special winning opening is opened, and other execution modes of the predetermined effect. In addition, the specific operation detection process includes, for example, a process of, for example, setting for vibrating the stick button controller 9031A in response to detecting the specific operation of the player.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific operation detection process. In the specific action detection process shown in FIG. 52, effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a big hit is occurring (step S90401). In step S90401, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that a big hit is occurring, for example, when the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received and the big hit end designation command has not been received. If the value of the effect process flag is any one of 3 to 5, it may be determined that a big hit is in progress. If a big hit is present (step S90401; Yes), it is determined whether there is a lever pull operation such as a pull operation of the stick button controller 9031A in the forward direction (step S90402). If there is a lever pull operation (step S90402; Yes), a timing process of the lever pull operation is performed (step S90403). In step S90403, the timer value of the lever pull operation timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 90122 is updated (for example, 1 is added).

  After the process of step S90403, it is determined whether or not the time counting result in the timing process of the lever pulling operation is 2 seconds (step S90404). In step S90404, when the timer value of the lever pull operation timer after the update in step S90403 is a value corresponding to "2 seconds", it is determined that the time measurement result is 2 seconds. When the time measurement result is 2 seconds (step S90404; Yes), the first vibration setting of the lever for vibrating the stick button controller 9031A in the first vibration mode (for example, the vibration mode such as “blue”) is performed (step S90404). S90405). If the time measurement result is not 2 seconds (Step S90404; No), it is determined whether the time measurement result of the lever pulling operation time measurement process is 5 seconds (Step S90406). In step S90406, when the timer value of the lever pull operation timer after the update in step S90403 is a value corresponding to "5 seconds", it is determined that the time measurement result is 5 seconds. If the time measurement result is 5 seconds (step S90406; Yes), the second vibration setting of the lever for vibrating the stick button controller 9031A in the second vibration mode (for example, the vibration mode such as “brubrubru”) is performed (step S90406). S90407). After executing the processing of steps S90405 and S90407, or when the time measurement result is not 5 seconds in step S90406 (step S90406; No), the specific action detection processing ends.

  If there is no lever pulling operation in step S90402 (step S90402; No), it is determined whether there is a timing result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation (step S90411). In step S90411, for example, if the timer value of the lever pull operation timer is an initial value, it is determined that there is no timekeeping result. If there is a timing result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation (step S90411; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timing result is 5 seconds or more (lever pulling 5 seconds or more) (step S90412). If the time measurement result is 5 seconds or longer (step S90412; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is in the off state (step S90413). If the stop flag is off (step S90413; Yes), the stop flag is switched to the on state (step S90414). If the stop flag is on (step S90413; No), The stop flag is turned off (step S90415). By performing the switching of the on / off state of the stop flag, the presence / absence (executable / non-executable) of the predetermined effect as an execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed.

  If the time measurement result is not 5 seconds or more in step S90412 (step S90412; No), it is determined whether the time measurement result is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (step S90421). If the time measurement result is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (lever pulling is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) (step S90421; Yes), it is determined whether the suppression flag is off (step S90422). When the suppression flag is in the off state (step S90422; Yes), the suppression flag is switched to the on state (step S90423), and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed (step S90424). When the suppression flag is on (step S90422; No), the suppression flag is switched to the off state (step S90425), and the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed (step S90426). The execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by performing the normal setting and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect. In addition, when the stop flag is in the ON state, even when the normal setting or the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed, a mode in which the predetermined effect is not executable has priority.

  After executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, S90424, and S90426, or when the timekeeping result is not less than 2 seconds and less than 5 seconds in step S90421 (step S90421; No), the timekeeping result in the timekeeping processing of the lever pull operation is initialized. (Step S90431). By executing the process of step S90431, the timekeeping result is 0 seconds, that is, there is no timekeeping result. After executing the processing of step S90431, or when there is no timing result in the timing processing of the lever pull operation in step S90411 (step S90411; No), the specific operation detection processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S90401 that there is no big hit (step S90401; No), it is determined whether there is a timing result in the timing processing of the lever pull operation (step S90451). If there is a timing result (step S90451; Yes), the time measurement result is initialized (step S90452). After executing the process of step S90452, or when there is no timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pull operation in step S90451 (step S90452; No), the specific operation detection process ends.

  Here, for example, when the lever pulling operation is started by the player within a period from two seconds before the big hit end specifying command is received to the time when the big hit end specifying command is received, the timing result in the timing process of the lever pulling operation is obtained. Is not longer than 2 seconds, the ON / OFF state of the suppression flag is not switched, and the processing of the suppression setting of the predetermined effect and the normal setting of the predetermined effect (step S90426) are not executed. The timing result is initialized. Further, for example, when the lever pulling operation by the player is started within a period from 5 seconds before receiving the big hit end specifying command to when the big hit end specifying command is received and the lever pulling operation is continued, the lever pulling operation is performed. Since the timed result in the timed processing of the above does not exceed 5 seconds, the on / off state of the stop flag is not switched, and the timed result is initialized. Unless the on / off state of the suppression flag or the stop flag is switched, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed. As described above, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation such as the lever pull operation by the player.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the execution mode of the predetermined effect in the on / off state of the stop flag / suppression flag. In this embodiment, for example, an effect of outputting a prize sound notifying that a game ball has won a large winning opening (a large winning opening winning effect) and a remaining winning number display indicating a remaining winning number in a round game are performed. There are a plurality of predetermined effects such as an effect (a special winning opening winning effect) and an effect of outputting a special winning opening opening sound for notifying that the special winning opening is opened (a special winning opening opening effect). Then, the execution mode of the plurality of predetermined effects is changed by switching the on / off state of the stop flag / suppression flag. Note that the predetermined effect may be an effect other than the above three effects. Further, any one or two of the three predetermined effects may be executable.

  Note that the prize sound for notifying that the gaming ball has won the large winning opening includes a normal prize sound and an over prize sound, and the normal prize sound is output when, for example, 1 to 10 prizes are generated. The over-winning sound is a winning sound output when, for example, 11 or more winnings have occurred. The normal winning sound and the over winning sound need only be distinguishable by, for example, different timbres and volumes. In addition, the remaining winning number display includes a normal mode remaining winning number display and an over mode remaining winning number display. The normal mode remaining winning number display is, for example, when there is no winning and 1 to 10 winnings occur. The display of the remaining number of prizes displayed when the prize is made, and the display of the number of remaining prizes in the over mode is, for example, the display of the number of remaining prizes displayed when 11 or more prizes are generated. The remaining winning number display may be performed by, for example, displaying a remaining winning number display image on the image display device 905.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the execution mode of the predetermined effect when both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state is a normal execution mode (a mode in which the predetermined effect can be executed), and the normal execution mode. Is set when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is initialized, or when the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed by the processing of step S90426 when the stop flag is off. In the normal mode of execution, all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings, and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound can be executed (with execution). The volume output level for the large winning opening sound is set to a normal level (for example, the lowest level and the third level among the first to fifth levels), and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to a high level. You. Note that display transparency, display size, display color, sound quality, and the like may be set instead of or together with the brightness level. Here, the normal level as the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound may be the same volume output level as the normal level (third level) in the above-described volume status display. In the sound volume state display process of step S90161, when the sound volume output level is changed in accordance with the player's operation such as leftward or rightward operation of the stick button controller 9031A by the player, the change is made according to the change. Thus, the volume output levels of the winning sound and the grand opening sound may be changed.

  The execution mode of the predetermined effect when the stop flag is in the on state is the execution mode at the time of stop (the mode in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed). Regardless of the status, the flag is set when the stop flag is turned on. In the stop mode, all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings, and an effect of outputting a special winning opening sound are impossible (no execution).

  When the stop flag is in the off state and the suppression flag is in the on state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is the execution mode at the time of suppression (suppression mode). In this state, it is set when the predetermined effect suppression setting is performed by the process of step S90424. In the execution mode at the time of suppression, all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying a remaining winning number display, and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound can be executed (there is an execution). And the volume output level for the big win opening sound is set to the lowest level (for example, the lowest level and the lowest level among the first to fifth levels), and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to the low level. You. Here, the minimum level as the volume output level for the winning sound and the grand opening opening sound may be the same volume output level as the minimum level in the volume status display described above.

  In the big hit song determination process in step S90163, for example, in the big hit game state (during the big hit), in response to detecting a predetermined operation of the player such as an operation on the push button 9031B by the player, the music of the plurality of types of music is determined. The processing for selecting one of them is included.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the song determination process during a big hit. Here, the song during the big hit is a song that can be reproduced during the big hit game state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of songs are prepared. The prepared plural types of music will be described later. In the song determination process during a big hit shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a big hit start designation command has been received (step S90621). When the jackpot start designation command is received (step S90621; Yes), the count value K is updated to be incremented by one (step S90622). The consecutive channel count value K is a value stored in the consecutive channel counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and may be any value that indicates the consecutive channel number. Here, the consecutive chan is performed a predetermined number of times when the variable display result is "big hit" when the probability change state or the time saving state is set and the variable change result is controlled to the probability change state or the time saving state even after the big hit game state ends. That means. In addition, the consecutive number of times, the variable display result is "big hit" when in the probable change state or the time saving state, and continuously controlled to be in the probable change state or the time saving state even after the big hit game state ends. Refers to the number of times. The count value K of the number of consecutive times is initialized to “0” when the probability change state or the time saving state ends and the state is controlled to a normal state (also referred to as a low-probability low base state) that is not the probability change state or the time reduction state. .

  After executing the processing of step S90622, or when there is no reception of the jackpot start designation command in step S90621 (step S90621; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step S90622a). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the big hit is being performed when the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received and the big hit end designation command is not received. If the value of the effect process flag is any one of 3 to 5, it may be determined that a big hit is in progress. If it is not during the big hit (step S90622a; No), the music determination process during the big hit is terminated, while if it is the big hit (step S90622a; Yes), the music determined flag is in the ON state (the music during the big hit is determined). Is determined) (step S90623). Here, the tune determined flag indicates whether or not the tune during the big hit has been determined, and is set to an on state in step S90633 described later, and is cleared to an off state in step S90636. The data indicating the on or off state of the music determined flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122.

  If the song determined flag is off (the song during the big hit has not been determined) (step S90623; No), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to the consecutive-number-of-times counter provided in the RAM 90122 as described above, and It is determined whether or not the consecutive-channel count value K = 1) (step S90624).

  If it is the initial hit (K = 1) in step S90624 (step S90624; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the current big hit involves music-related reach (step S90625). . Here, the music-related reach is a reach in which a music according to the type of the reach is reproduced during the reach effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), for example, super reach A 'to C' are set as music-related reach. In the music-related reach, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), a music piece corresponding to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined mode during the super reach effect.

  In step S90625, if it is a music-type reach hit (step S90625; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a hit song according to the reach type (step S90626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), if the reach type is super reach A ′, the song during the big hit is determined to be “song A”, and if the reach type is super reach B ′, the middle hit song is determined. The song is determined to be "Song B", and if it is a super reach C ', the hit song is determined to be "Song C". As described above, when the first hit is a music-based hit jackpot, the song is determined to be a predetermined hit jackpot song according to the reach type, so that the player cannot select the hit jackpot song by the selecting operation. It has become. If the first hit is a music-based reach jackpot, after playing the song during the super-reach production, the same song as the song is played from the continuation of the part that was being played during the super-reach production at the start of the big hit . Thereby, the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced without interruption from the super reach to the big hit game.

  If it is not the initial hit (K = 1) in step S90624 (step S90624; No), or if it is the initial hit (step S90624; Yes), but it is not the music-type reach big hit (step S90625; No), the effect control is performed. The CPU 90120 determines whether or not the first round in which the number of round games executed in the big hit game state is “1” is being executed (step S90627). For example, it can be determined whether or not it is the first round by confirming which round number command is stored in the special winning opening opening designated command storage area.

  If the first round is being executed (step S90627; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the specific part of the selected song (step S90628). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 sends a command to the voice control board 9013 to output a specified portion (in this embodiment, a so-called “rust” portion) of the selected music to the voice control board 9013. To transmit the selected part of the selected music from the speakers 908L and 908R. That is, in the process of step S90628, only the chorus portion of the currently selected big hit song is reproduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 55C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music pieces that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the number of songs that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase as the number of consecutive chan increases. More specifically, in this embodiment, three songs (songs A to C) can be selected when 1 ≦ K ≦ 5 (K: the above-mentioned consecutive-channel count value), and four songs when 6 ≦ K ≦ 10. Selectable from songs (Songs A to D), selectable from 5 songs (Songs A to E) when 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, and selectable from 6 songs (Songs A to F) when 16 ≦ K Have been. For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the initial hit (K = 1) increases by one, and when K = 3, the songs that can be selected from the initial hit (K = 1). For example, the number of selectable songs may be sequentially increased by the number of consecutive chan such that the number of songs increases by two. Also, rather than according to the prescribed number of consecutive chan, it is determined by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected each time a big hit and which type of song can be selected. Is also good. Further, in addition to the super reach A ′ to C ′ shown in FIG. 55 (A), for example, a super reach D ′ executed only during the probability change is provided. A configuration is also possible in which the music D corresponding to the super reach D 'can be selected.

  In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the selection of the music is performed by displaying an image indicating the currently selectable music displayed on the image display device 905 (FIG. 56 (B) satisfies 1 ≦ K ≦ 5). The display is performed by, for example, placing the cursor CU on a display example of the corresponding music pieces A to C). The music selection operation is performed, for example, by the player pressing down on the push button 9031B. For example, each time a push operation (simple push) is performed on the push button 9031B for a short period of time, the image indicating the song name moves, and the song corresponding to the image of the song positioned (pointed) to the cursor CU is displayed. , The currently selected song (FIG. 56B shows an example in which “song A” is being selected). That is, in step S90628, when the cursor CU is pointed to another song, the climax part of the song to which the cursor CU has moved (the song currently pointed to by the cursor CU) is reproduced. As shown in FIG. 55 (C), when a song is added in accordance with an increase in the number of consecutive chan, the initial position of the cursor CU is preferably set to a position indicating the added song. . In this way, the newly added music can be appropriately notified to the player. However, when the same music is selected in the immediately preceding big hit (for example, the last two hits), it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU be the position indicating the same music. By doing so, it is possible to present music that matches the taste of the player, and it is user-friendly.

  The cursor CU may be moved in response to a selection operation with respect to the image indicating the music title. Further, the method of indicating the currently selected song is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU, and the image indicating the selected song can be more easily recognized than the images indicating the other songs (for example, indicating the currently selected song). The frame image surrounding the image may be superimposed, the image indicating the selected music may be shined, or the image indicating the music other than the selected music may be difficult or invisible. In addition, when selecting a song, the volume output level may be increased to output a song identification unit. For example, when the current volume output level is the normal level (the third level), when the music is selected, the specific unit is output at the fourth level or the fifth level (the highest level), or the current level is output. When the volume output level is the lowest level or the first level, the specific section may be output at the normal level when selecting a music piece.

  Further, the “specific part” is a part of the selected music and a part different from the head of the music. In this embodiment, a so-called “rust” is an example of a music identification unit. Here, in this embodiment, the music data of the music pieces A to F as the big hit music pieces are stored in the ROM 90121 or the like in advance. Then, the music data indicating one music is composed of a plurality of audio data (for example, WAV, MP3, etc.) including rust data (an example of the identification unit data) indicating rust sound. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (A) for "Song A", data indicating the entire song A is intro data, A melody data, B melody data, chorus data, The data is stored in the ROM 90121 in a divided form such as outro data (each as separate audio data). The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other big hit songs. According to such a configuration, the load on the data capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the specific part data is stored in addition to the data for one piece of music. Note that, during a predetermined production such as a reach production or a preview production of a music-related reach, a part of data of one music (for example, data for B melody) is used alone, so that the music can be reproduced during the predetermined production. Only a part may be output. This makes it possible to further utilize the advantage of a configuration in which data indicating one music piece is stored as divided data as in this embodiment.

  In addition, for rust data as an example of the specific part data, for each song, for example, a part that is assumed to be familiar, has an impact, or is assumed to be catchy is selected in advance as “rust”, and Audio data may be prepared in advance as rust data. Also, for example, song A is famous for "chorus", while song C is more famous for "A melody". In this case, for the music C, the specific portion is set to A melody (the specific portion data is data for A melody), and if the music C is being selected in step S90628, the A melody portion may be reproduced. Also, the song during the jackpot may include a song with a so-called rust (a song whose song starts with a rust). Then, the specifying unit may be the head of the music (characteristic intro or rust). That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music. In addition, when a song with a head rust is included in the song during the jackpot, the data used as the song data may be common between the song selection and after the song is determined. For example, at the time of music selection, the rust and the part following the rust (for example, A melody) are used to reproduce the rust and the part following the rust, and the same data is used after the music is determined. Then, the rust and the part following the rust may be connected and reproduced.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90628 shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not a music determination operation has been performed (step S90629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation (long press) of the push button 9031B for a long period (for example, one second), and the production control CPU 90120 determines that the music determination operation has been performed when the music determination operation is detected. do it. If there is no music determination operation (step S90629; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is time to close the special winning opening (step S90630). For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the first round end designation command (special winning opening closing designation command) from the main board 9011, the CPU 90120 may determine that it is the timing for closing the special winning opening. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S90629; Yes) or when it is the big winning opening closing timing (step S90630; No), the music being selected is determined (step S90631). That is, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first round, when the music determination operation is performed before the large winning opening is closed, or when the large winning opening is closed without performing the music determining operation, The currently selected song is determined to be a hit song.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the music is selected, the specific part of the selected music is reproduced, and when the music is selected, there are a plurality of methods for determining the music. For this reason, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90626 or step S90631, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the music information determined in step S90626 or S90631 in the RAM 90122 (step S90632), and sets the music determined flag to the ON state (step S90633). . The data indicating the on / off state of the music determination flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 90122.

  If it is determined in step S90623 that the music determined flag is in the ON state (step S90623; Yes), the large hit music determined in step S90626 or S90631 is reproduced (step S90634). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the big hit end timing (step S90635). If it is the big hit end timing (step S90635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started to be reproduced in step S90634 is ended. Then, the music determined flag is cleared to the off state (step S90636).

  After execution of the processing of steps S90636 and S90633, or if the determination in step S90621, S90627, S90630, or S90635 is No, or if the determination in step S90622 is Yes, the song determination processing during the big hit is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in reach other than the music-related reach, during the execution of the first round, the song during the big hit can be selected by the selection operation by the player (the above-described step S90628). I have. In this embodiment, “reach: normal (big hit)” (variation pattern PA′3-1) shown in FIG. 45 is prepared as a reach other than the music system reach, but as a super reach other than the music system reach, Reach types such as “Super Reach D” and “Super Reach E” are further prepared, and when the jackpot is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the player The song during the big hit may be selectable by a selection operation. Further, in the above example, the example in which the song during the big hit is selectable during the first round is shown. However, the song may be selectable during another round, or the song may be selected over a plurality of rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot is arbitrary.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56, a description will be given of the music reproduction mode when the big hit music is selected and after the big hit music is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (B), at the time of music selection, a specific part (for example, “rust”) of the selected music is output from the speakers 908L and 908R (corresponding to step S90628). The specific unit is continuously played back until the currently selected song is determined. Then, the length of the specific portion is a period until the music piece being selected is determined (corresponding to a period from the start of execution of the first round to the execution of the processing of step S90631. Alternatively, if the execution period of the first round is shorter (for example, 29.5 seconds), the specific section is repeatedly played back until the currently selected music piece is determined. If the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part of the selected music (FIG. 56A In the example of), the outro) indicated by the “outro data” may be reproduced.

  In this embodiment, at the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the selected music (hereinafter, music-compatible image) is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 56 (B). The music-corresponding image is, for example, a moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) and MV (Music Video) of the selected music. When the music is selected, for example, a portion corresponding to the specific portion of the moving image is reproduced in the display area VA1. I do. In addition, the moving image as the music corresponding image does not have to be reproduced from a portion corresponding to the specific portion of the music. For example, when a song is selected, the song may be played from a specific part other than the beginning, but the moving image may be played from the beginning. Further, the music-compatible image may be a still image indicating an artist photograph or the like instead of a moving image. Also, the data of the music corresponding image may be stored in the ROM 90121 or the like in a manner divided into individual music parts (each as separate image data), similarly to the audio data of the music.

As shown in FIG. 56 (C), after the music is determined, a plurality of divided audio data (for example, intro data, A melody data, B melody data, One piece of music is reproduced from the speakers 908L and 908R by connecting the data for rust and the data for outro (that is, so that each part making up one music is reproduced in a time-series manner without interruption). The determined playing mode of the hit song (corresponding to the playing mode of the song in step S90634) is, for example, as described in (a) to (c) below.
(A) After the music is determined during the execution of one round, the music is reproduced from the continuation of the specific portion that was being reproduced at the time of selection, or from the beginning of the music.
(B) In the second and subsequent rounds, the music is reproduced from the beginning (for example, the music is reproduced from the beginning in response to the reception of the round start command of the second round (the special winning opening opening designation command)).
(C) In the case of K = 1 (Step S90624; Yes) and the song-type reach jackpot (Step S90625; Yes), the music corresponding to the reach type is continued from the part played during the super-reach production. Reproduction (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), during the super reach production, the “intro”, “A melody”, and “B melody” of the music corresponding to the reach type are reproduced, and when a big hit occurs, “rust” To play).
After the song is determined, the song is played back from the beginning (intro), and after the song has completed one round until the end (outro) of the song in a state where the jackpot has not yet ended, the process returns to the intro of the song and returns to the intro. The eyes may be reproduced, or may be reproduced not from the intro but from the rust (specific part).

  After the music is determined, the music corresponding image is displayed, for example, in a display area VA2 shown in FIG. 56 (C) which is larger than the display area VA1. The example shown in FIG. 56C is an example in which the display area VA2 is formed over the entire image display area of the image display device 905 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which a part corresponding to a reproduction part of the music is sequentially reproduced may be displayed in the display area VA2. The music-corresponding image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may be a still image such as an artist photograph. Also, the music corresponding images at the time of music selection and after the music is determined may have different display modes. That is, the display mode may be changed by a method other than changing the position and size of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 in which the music corresponding image is displayed. For example, the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 have the same position and size, but the music-corresponding image after the music is determined does not have an effect at the time of music selection (for example, a fade-in / fade-out effect or a shining lighting effect). Etc.) may be applied.

  Note that the operation means for performing the music selection operation and the determination operation is not limited to the above-described push button 9031B. The operation means may be, for example, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be turned, for example, or a touch panel or the like that can perform a touch operation or a press operation. . Further, any configuration may be used as long as the operation content can be detected in accordance with the operation by the player. For example, any operation not limited to the instruction input operation by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, and a CMOS sensor, may be used. A sensor that can be detected may be used.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit production process executed in step S90175 shown in FIG. In the big hit middle production process shown in FIG. 57, first, the production control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a big hit end designation command has been received (step S90581). If the jackpot end designation command has not been received (step S90581; No), after executing the special winning opening winning effect process (step S90582), the special winning opening opening effect process is executed (step S90583). Then, after executing other big hit middle productions (step S90584), the big hit middle production processing ends.

  If a jackpot end designation command has been received in step S90581 (step S90581; Yes), the end of the big hit middle production is set (step S90591), and the value of the production control process flag is updated to “6”. (Step S90592), the big hit production process ends. In step S90591, for example, the stop flag and the suppression flag may be turned off (initial state). With this configuration, even if the big hit game state ends with the stop flag and the suppression flag being on, the stop flag and the suppression flag are turned off at the timing when the big hit game state ends, and the predetermined effect is executed. The mode is set to the normal mode. The timing at which the stop flag and the suppression flag are turned off is not limited to the step S90591, that is, the timing at which the big hit end designation command is received. For example, a round end command designating the end of the last round in the big hit game state is received. Or a timing at which a change start command for a change executed first after the end of the big hit gaming state is received.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the special winning opening prize production process executed in step S90582 shown in FIG. In the special winning opening winning effect process shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a round start command, which is an effect control command indicating that a round is to be started, has been received (step S90801). If a round start command has been received (step S90801; Yes), the count value of the special winning opening winning counter (a special winning opening winning count value C) provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control counter setting unit) of the RAM 90122 or the like is determined. It is initialized to "0" (step S90802). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is in an on state (step S90803). When the stop flag is off (step S90803; No), the setting for starting the display of the remaining winning number is performed in a normal manner (step S90804), and when the stop flag is on (step S90804). S90803; Yes), the large winning opening winning effect processing is ended without performing the setting for starting the remaining winning number display.

  In this embodiment, the remaining winning number display in the normal mode is performed according to the special winning opening winning count value C. The remaining winning number display in the normal mode is, for example, displaying the same number of winning ball corresponding images as the remaining winning number, or displaying the winning ball corresponding image in combination with a numerical image indicating the remaining winning number, or the like. For this reason, it is only necessary to indicate the remaining number of winnings in the round game. For example, when the special winning opening winning count value C is “0”, it is sufficient to display ten winning ball corresponding images to indicate that the remaining winning number is “10”, When the special winning opening winning count value C is “1”, it is sufficient to display nine winning ball corresponding images to indicate that the remaining winning number is “9”. When the special winning opening winning count value C is "2" to "10", eight to zero winning ball corresponding images are displayed so that the remaining winning numbers are "8" to "0". It just needs to be shown. Further, for example, when the special winning opening winning count value C is “0”, by displaying one winning ball corresponding image and a numerical image indicating “10” in combination, the remaining winning number is reduced. It is only necessary to indicate that it is “10”, and when the special winning opening winning count value C is “1”, a single winning ball corresponding image and a numerical image indicating “9” are displayed in combination. By doing so, it is only necessary to indicate that the remaining winning number is “9”. When the special winning opening winning count value C is "2" to "10", the remaining image is displayed by combining one winning ball corresponding image and a numerical image indicating "8" to "0". It is only necessary to show that the winning number of "8" is "8" to "0".

  In the processing of step S90804, since the big winning opening winning count value C has been initialized to “0” in step S90802, the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is “10” is performed. .

  If the round start command has not been received in step S90801 (step S90801; No), it is determined whether or not a special winning opening winning designation command, which is an effect control command indicating that there is a winning in the special winning opening, has been received. (Step S90811). When the special winning opening winning command is received (step S90811; Yes), the special winning opening winning count value C is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S90812). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S90813). If the stop flag is off (step S90813; No), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning count C is equal to or greater than "10" (step S90814).

  If the special winning opening winning count value C is equal to or less than "10" (step S90814; Yes), the setting for updating the remaining winning number display is performed (step S90815). For example, when the big winning opening winning count value C becomes “1” in step S90812, the display is updated to the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is “9” in step S90815. . Then, a setting for outputting a normal winning sound notifying that the gaming ball has won the large winning opening is performed (step S90816).

  If the special winning opening winning count value C is not equal to or less than "10", that is, if the special winning opening winning count value C is equal to or more than "11" (step S90814; No), the remaining winning number display is updated in an over mode. Settings are made (step S90817). For example, in a case where the special winning opening winning count value C becomes “11” in Step S90812, the display is updated to the over-available remaining winning number display in Step S90817. In this embodiment, for example, an over-prize occurrence image indicating the occurrence of an over-prize is displayed in place of the winning-ball-corresponding image and the numerical image in the normal mode, thereby displaying the remaining number of wins in the over-mode. After that, a setting is made to output an over-winning sound for notifying that the gaming ball has won the large winning opening (step S90818). By executing the processing of steps S90817 and S90818, the occurrence of an over-win is notified. Note that, even if an over-winning occurs, the output of the over-winning sound and the display of the remaining winning number in the over mode may not be performed.

  After executing the processing of steps S90816 and S90818, or when the stop flag is on in step S90813 (step S90813; Yes), the special winning opening winning award effect processing ends. As described above, when the stop flag is in the ON state, the update setting of the remaining winning number display is not performed, and further, the output setting of the winning sound (normal winning sound, over winning sound) is not performed.

  If no special winning opening winning designation command has been received in step S90811 (step S90811; No), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S90831). If the stop flag is in the ON state (step S90831; Yes), it is determined whether or not the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S90832). If the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S90832; Yes), the setting for ending the remaining winning number display is performed (step S90833). If the stop flag is in the off state (step S90831; No), it is determined whether or not the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S90834). If the remaining winning number display is not being executed (step S90834; No), the setting for starting the remaining winning number display in a normal manner is performed (step S90835). After executing the processing of steps S90833 and S90835, or when the remaining winning number display is not being executed in step S90832 (step S90832; No), when the remaining winning number display is being executed in step S90834 (step S90832). S90834; Yes), terminates the special winning opening winning effect production process.

  As described above, during the big hit (the value of the effect process flag is “5”), the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S90831, and the remaining winning number display is executed according to the on / off state of the stop flag. (Display / non-display) can be switched. At the time of winning the special winning opening, the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S90813. If the stop flag is off, a winning sound (normal winning sound, over winning sound) is output. On the other hand, if the stop flag is in the ON state, no winning sound is output. When the suppression flag is in the ON state, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S90424. Therefore, in steps S90804, S90815 to S90818, and S90835, the remaining winning number display and the prize sound are suppressed in the suppression mode. Output is performed. When the suppression flag is in the OFF state, the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S90426. Therefore, in steps S90804, S90815 to S90818, and S90835, the remaining winning number display and the prize sound based on the normal setting are performed. Is output.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special winning opening effect processing performed in step S90583 illustrated in FIG. 57. In the special winning opening opening effect process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a round start command, which is an effect control command indicating that a round is to be started, has been received (step S90901). . If a round start command has been received (step S90901; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S90902). When the stop flag is in the off state (step S90902; No), the setting for outputting the special winning opening sound is performed (step S90903). After executing the processing of step S90903, or when the round start command is not received in step S90901 (step S90901; No), the special winning opening opening effect processing ends.

  As described above, when the special winning opening is opened (at the start of the round game), the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S90902, and if the stop flag is off, the special winning opening sound is generated. On the other hand, if the stop flag is in the ON state, the special winning opening sound is not output. When the suppression flag is on, the predetermined effect is set to be suppressed in step S90424. Therefore, in step S90903, the special winning opening sound is output in the suppression mode. In addition, when the suppression flag is in the OFF state, the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S90426, and thus, in step S90903, the large winning opening opening sound based on the normal setting is output. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a description will be given of the execution timing of a special winning opening sound, a ball-drop error display, and the like.

  FIG. 60 (A) shows a state in which the selected song is being played in the big hit game state (on state) and the stop flag is in the off state, a big winning opening opening sound and a winning sound (normal winning sound / over). The drawing shows execution timings of predetermined effects such as a (winning sound) and a remaining winning number display, and a ball-drop error notification such as a ball-drop error display and a ball-drop error notification sound. It should be noted that the ball drop error notification is started during the round game. Further, when the suppression flag is on, the volume output level and the brightness level are lower than when the suppression flag is off, and a predetermined value is obtained regardless of whether the suppression flag is on or off. The execution timing of the effect and the error notification is the same. FIG. 60A shows a round game of the tenth round as an example. Note that round games other than the tenth round are basically the same as in FIG. 60 (A), but the first round game is the same as in FIG. 60 (A) after music is selected and reproduced. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60A, a round game of the tenth round is started at timing T0. At this timing T0, the opening of the special winning opening is started, and the special winning opening sound is output by the processing of step S90903 shown in FIG. The large winning opening winning count value is initialized to "0" by the processing of step S90802 shown in FIG. Then, the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is “10” is started by the processing of step S90804.

  When a winning in the special winning opening occurs, the special winning opening winning count value is set to “1” by the processing of step S90812 shown in FIG. 58, the normal winning sound is output by the processing of step S90816, and the remaining processing is performed by the processing of step S90815 The winning number display is updated to the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is “9”. Thereafter, each time a winning in the special winning opening occurs, the special winning opening winning count value is increased, a normal winning sound is output, and the remaining winning number display is updated.

  For example, when the lower plate becomes full of game balls at the timing T1, the ball-drop error display is started with the normal size by the processing of step S90305 shown in FIG. I do. If the suppression flag is on at the timing T1, the ball-drop error display is started at the reduced size. Then, at the timing T2 at which the ball drop error has been eliminated, the ball drop error display and the output of the ball drop error notification sound are ended by the processing of steps S90312 and S90313 shown in FIG. In the period from the timing T1 to the timing T2, the music, the winning sound, and the beading error notification sound are output in a superimposed manner. Output including mouth opening sound).

  As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the state where the special winning opening winning count value is “9” and the remaining winning number is “1”, the remaining special winning opening is displayed. When a prize occurs, the winning prize mouth winning count value is set to “10”, a normal prize sound is output, and the remaining prize number display is changed to the remaining prize number display indicating that the remaining prize number is “0”. Update. Further, immediately after the winning, a winning in the grand prize mouth further occurs and an over prize is generated. When the over prize occurs, the grand prize mouth winning count value is set to "11", and the over prize sound is obtained in step S90818 shown in FIG. Is output, and the display of the remaining winning number is updated in an over mode in step S90817.

  Then, based on the fact that ten game balls have entered the special winning opening and a winning ball has been generated, the tenth round game is ended at timing T3. At this timing T3, the opening of the special winning opening ends. Thereafter, the eleventh round game is started at timing T4 when a next round waiting period, which is a waiting period until the next round game is started, has elapsed. At this timing T4, the opening of the special winning opening is started, a special winning opening sound is output, the special winning opening winning count value is initialized to “0”, and the remaining winning number is “10”. The display of the number of remaining prizes indicating the presence of the game is started.

  FIG. 60 (B) shows a state in which the selected music is being played in the big hit game state (on state), and when the stop flag is switched on / off, a big winning opening opening sound and a winning sound (normal winning sound). The timing of execution of predetermined effects such as an over-winning sound and the number of remaining winnings, and ball-off error notification such as ball-off error display and ball-off error notification sound. In FIG. 60B, the description will be made on the assumption that the on / off state of the stop flag is switched in the middle of FIG. 60A.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60 (B), a round game of the tenth round is started at timing T0 as in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A). Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 60A, at the timing T1, the ball-drop error display is started with the normal size, and the output of the ball-drop error notification sound is started. Here, based on the fact that the player pulls the stick button controller 9031A continuously for 5 seconds and detects the operation, the stop flag is turned on at the timing T1 'by the process of step S90414 shown in FIG.

  When the stop flag is turned on, the display of the number of remaining winnings is terminated by the processing of step S90833 shown in FIG. In addition, by switching to the reduced size by the processing of step S90325 shown in FIG. 48, the ball-drop error display is continuously performed, and the ball-drop error notification sound is continuously output. Then, at the timing T2 at which the ball drop error has been eliminated, the ball drop error display and the output of the ball drop error notification sound are ended. As described above, in the period from the timing T1 to the timing T1 ′, the music, the large winning opening opening sound, the winning sound, and the ball drop error notification sound can be output, and the remaining winning number display and the ball drop error display can be executed. On the other hand, during the period from the timing T1 ′ to the timing T2, the music and the balling error notification sound can be output, the large opening opening sound and the winning sound cannot be output, the remaining winning number display cannot be executed, and the balling error cannot be performed. The display is executable.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the state where the special winning opening prize count value is “9”, if a further prize to the special winning opening occurs, the special winning opening prize count value is set to “10”. Does not output the winning sound. In this state, the remaining winning number display is not performed. Further, immediately after the winning, a winning in the special winning opening further occurs, and an over-winning occurs. When the over-winning occurs, the winning-winning opening winning count value is set to “11”, but the over-winning sound is not output. In this state, the remaining winning number display is not performed.

  Then, based on the fact that ten game balls have entered the special winning opening and a winning ball has been generated, the tenth round game is ended at timing T3. At this timing T3, the opening of the special winning opening ends. Thereafter, the eleventh round game is started at timing T4 when a next round waiting period, which is a waiting period until the next round game is started, has elapsed. At this timing T4, opening of the special winning opening is started, but since the stop flag is in the ON state, no special winning opening sound is output. In addition, the large winning opening winning count value is initialized to “0”, but the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is “10” is not started. Here, based on the fact that the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds and detects the operation, the stop flag is turned off at the timing T4 'by the processing of step S90415 shown in FIG.

  When the stop flag is turned off, the remaining winning number display is started by the process of step S90835 shown in FIG. Since the big winning opening winning count value at the timing T4 'is "0", the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is started at the timing T4'. Note that, for example, when the ball-drop error display is performed in the reduced size at the timing T4 ', the display is switched to the normal size and the ball-drop error display is continuously performed.

  When the player pulls the stick button controller 9031A continuously for two seconds and detects the operation, the process proceeds to step S90414 shown in FIG. 52, and when the suppression flag is turned on at the timing T1 ′, In the setting, the predetermined effect suppression setting in step S90424 shown in FIG. 52 is performed. In addition, by switching to the reduced size by the processing of step S90325 shown in FIG. 48, the ball-drop error display is continuously performed, and the ball-drop error notification sound is continuously output. Then, at the timing T2 at which the ball drop error has been eliminated, the ball drop error display and the output of the ball drop error notification sound are ended. In this case, even after the timing T <b> 1 ′, the music, the large winning opening opening sound, the winning sound, and the ball drop error notification sound can be output, and the remaining winning number display and the ball drop error display can be executed. However, since the predetermined effect suppression setting in step S90424 shown in FIG. 52 is performed, the output of the large winning opening sound and the winning sound and the display of the remaining winning number are performed in a suppressed manner after the timing T1 '.

  Then, based on the fact that the player has continuously pulled the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds and the operation has been detected, the suppression flag is turned off at the timing T4 ′ by the processing of step S90415 shown in FIG. The output of the winning opening sound and the winning sound thereafter and the remaining winning number display are performed in a normal manner.

  When the stop flag is turned off, the remaining winning number display is started by the process of step S90835 shown in FIG. Since the big winning opening winning count value at the timing T4 'is "0", the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is started at the timing T4'. Note that, for example, when the ball-drop error display is performed in the reduced size at the timing T4 ', the display is switched to the normal size and the ball-drop error display is continuously performed.

  Next, an example of an effect in the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 61 shows an example of an effect in the case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. For example, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PB'2-1 in which the reach effect of the music-related reach is executed (super-reach A 'is executed). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the description starts from the time when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state (reach established) as shown in FIG. 61 (A). In addition, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 61A by the volume status display processing shown in FIG.

  Through FIG. 61 (B), a reach effect in super reach as shown in FIG. 61 (C) is executed. By displaying an effect image (for example, an image using the character “Super Reach”) as shown in FIG. 61C on the screen of the image display device 905, the super reach is notified. The player can understand that the super reach effect is performed. Also, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 905. Further, the volume status display image VL is deleted from the screen of the image display device 905 by the volume status display erasing process (step S90707a) illustrated in FIG. 50, as illustrated in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the hold display is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (D), when the stick button controller 9031A is operated leftward or rightward during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player has operated the stick button controller 9031A once to the right, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the lit state of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume state display image is displayed. VL (the fourth-level volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 905, and the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R is increased by one level (to be a fourth-level volume output). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is deleted as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the battle effect result (here, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (G), and the super reach effect ends, and for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (I). The final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), since the super reach effect has been completed, the changed volume status display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored. Since the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop, the volume adjustment can be performed while not obstructing the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visual recognition of the game result.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 61 (D) and (E), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super-reach effect is other than the super-reach effect as shown in FIG. 61 (I). Is displayed in the same manner as the display state of the volume state display image VL in the gaming state (first state), so that the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. The display mode of the volume status display image VL in the second state may be different from the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the first state. Further, the volume status display image VL in the second state and the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed at the same display location or at different display locations.

  Immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from three seconds before the start to the start), the player may operate the stick button controller 9031A leftward or rightward. Also in this case, the display of the volume status display image VL is started based on the fact that such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A. Then, the super reach effect is started within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the display of the volume status display image VL. 51, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by the processing of steps S90701 to S90706 shown in FIG. Accordingly, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed in an extended manner, and the volume status display image VL is displayed at the start timing of the super reach effect. Can be prevented from being erased. In this embodiment, it is ensured that the volume status display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation. The display image VL may be displayed.

  Also, immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from three seconds before the end to the end), the player may operate the stick button controller 9031A in the left or right direction. Also in this case, the display of the volume status display image VL is started based on the fact that such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the display of the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, By the steps S90601, S90602, S90604, and S90605 shown in FIG. 50, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect. Has become. Thus, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. Useless processing of once deleting and displaying again can be omitted.

  During the super-reach effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced. For example, when the notification of super reach is executed as shown in FIG. 61 (C), for example, as shown in FIG. Are sequentially reproduced. Then, for example, between the effect shown in FIG. 61 (E) and the effect shown in FIG. 61 (F), the effect using the special sound effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, several seconds).

  As an effect using the special effect sound, for example, an effect using a so-called SE (Sound Effect) such as a sound subjected to an echo effect, a repeat sound, a noise sound, a sound subjected to a fade-in / fade-out, etc. may be executed. Moreover, silence may be performed only for the predetermined period. In addition, it is preferable that an effect is applied to the moving image reproduced during the super-reach effect together with the output of the special effect sound for the predetermined period. For example, if a moving image suddenly stops (becomes a still image), the screen is blacked out, or a noise display (for example, a sandstorm display on an analog television) is used. Good.

  Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation from the stick button controller 9031A or the push button 9031B being performed during the execution of the special sound effect, or according to the elapse of a predetermined period. The battle effect result shown in FIG. 61 (H) is displayed, and a loss effect sound for notifying the loss is output from the speakers 908L and 908R together with this display. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), rust is output from the speakers 908L and 908R as a continuation of the part of the music being reproduced during the super reach effect. In this way, by applying a special effect to the sound and the moving image before the result of the battle effect (the result of the effect of notifying the winning or losing), the expectation of the player can be increased.

  The period during which the special effect is executed may be set in advance for each variation pattern of the music-related reach, for example. Also, during the production of the music-related reach, the music does not have to be reproduced from the beginning (intro), and may be reproduced from the A melody, the B melody or the like. In addition, when a big hit occurs after the production of the music-related reach, the music may be reproduced from the continuation of the part reproduced during the reach-production of the music-related reach during the first round. For example, the A melody may be reproduced during the reach effect, and the B melody following the A melody may be reproduced during the first round. Alternatively, the music may be played to the middle of the A-melody during the reach effect, and the music may be played from the continuation of the A-melody during the first round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of an effect example such as a special winning opening sound or a ball drop error display. In the example shown in FIG. 62, it is assumed that the song A is selected as the song during the big hit, and even during the round game from the first round to the final round (for example, the 15th round), the PV (Promotion Video) of the song A and the song A , MV (Music Video) and the like. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the description will be made from the time when the stop flag is off and the suppression flag is off.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), for example, when a round game of the tenth round is started, a special winning opening sound is output in accordance with opening of the special winning opening. At this time, the big prize opening sound (opening sound) and the music are overlapped and output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The volume output level of the big winning opening sound (open sound) and the music is the normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161. Further, as the remaining winning number display, a remaining winning number display image NG indicating that the remaining winning number is “10” is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), by displaying ten winning ball corresponding images, it is shown that the remaining winning number is “10”.

  When the game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907 and a winning occurs in the large winning opening, a normal winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 62 (B). At this time, the normal winning sound (winning sound) and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the normal winning sound (winning sound) and the music is the normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161. Further, as the remaining winning number display, a remaining winning number display image NG indicating that the remaining winning number is “9” is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 62B, one of the ten winning ball corresponding images displayed is erased, so that the remaining winning number is “9”. It is shown.

  Here, when the lower plate is full of game balls, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), a message such as “Ball removal error! The ball drop error display image TG shown is displayed in the normal size. In addition, a ball drop error notification sound is output. At this time, the beading error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound and the music is the normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161.

  Here, when the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds and detects the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds), the stop flag is turned on. This completes the display of the remaining winning number as shown in FIG. 62 (D1) (the remaining winning number display image NG is erased). In this state, the sound of the ball-drop error notification and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition, the ball removal error display image TG is switched to the reduced size and is continuously displayed. By ending the display of the remaining winning numbers, the moving image of the music A can be easily recognized. Further, by switching the ball-drop error display image TG to the reduced size, the moving image of the music A can be easily recognized.

  After the stop flag is turned on, even if a game ball enters the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907 and a winning occurs in the special winning opening, the normal winning sound ( No prize sound) is output, and as shown in FIG. 62 (E1), only the ball-off error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  In the state shown in FIG. 62C, when the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds and detects the operation (lever pulling 2 seconds), the suppression flag is turned on. As a result, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), the remaining winning number display is changed to the suppression mode. Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG is low. In this state, the sound of the ball-drop error notification and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Note that the volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound and the music is a normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161. In addition, the ball removal error display image TG is switched to the reduced size and is continuously displayed. By changing the remaining winning number display to the suppression mode, the moving image of the music A can be easily recognized. Further, by switching the ball-drop error display image TG to the reduced size, the moving image of the music A can be easily recognized.

  Then, after the suppression flag is turned on, when the game ball enters the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907 and a winning occurs in the special winning opening, FIG. 62 (E2) As shown, the speaker 908L and 908R output a beeping error notification sound, music, and a normal winning sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. Note that the volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound and the music is a normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161. Therefore, the normal prize sound is output at a volume lower than that of the ball-drop error notification sound or the music.

  In this embodiment, the player pulls the stick button controller 9031A continuously for 5 seconds while the ball-drop error display and the ball-drop error notification sound are being output as shown in FIG. 62 (C). When the operation (the lever pulling operation for 5 seconds) is detected and the stop flag is turned on, the display of the number of remaining winnings is terminated as shown in FIG. 62 (D1), and a winning in the big winning opening occurs. Even though the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, the display of the reduced-size ball-drop error display and the output of the ball-drop error notification sound are continuously performed. As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed during the ball-drop error notification such as the ball-drop error display and the output of the ball-drop error notification sound, The ease of recognizing the ball drop error notification changes. Specifically, since the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, it becomes easy to recognize the dropout error notification sound (it becomes easy to hear). In addition, by switching to the reduced size ball error display, it becomes difficult to recognize (visually recognize) the ball error display. In addition, although the ball removal error display is switched to the reduced size based on the detection of the specific operation such as the lever pulling of 5 seconds, the ball removal error display need not be switched to the reduced size. Even in this case, the ease of recognizing the ball drop error notification changes. Specifically, the end of the display of the remaining number of winnings makes it easier to recognize (visually recognize) the ball error display.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the ball-dropping error display and the ball-dropping error notification sound are being performed as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the player continues the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds. 62 (D2), the remaining winning number display is changed to the suppression mode, and the state is changed to the special winning opening, as shown in FIG. 62 (D2). Even if a winning occurs, the normal winning sound (winning sound) is output in a suppressed manner, while the ball-off error display and the ball-off error notification sound are continuously output. As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode during the ball extraction error notification such as the ball extraction error display and the output of the ball extraction error notification sound, the recognition of the ball extraction error notification is performed. The ease of doing changes. Specifically, when the volume output level of the normal winning sound (winning sound) becomes the lowest level, it becomes easy to recognize the dropout error notification sound (it becomes easy to hear). In addition, by switching to the reduced size ball error display, it becomes difficult to recognize (visually recognize) the ball error display. In addition, although the ball removal error display is switched to the reduced size based on the detection of the specific operation such as the lever pulling of 2 seconds, the ball removal error display need not be switched to the reduced size. Even in this case, the ease of recognizing the ball drop error notification changes. Specifically, when the brightness level of the remaining winning number display becomes low, it becomes easy to recognize (visually recognize) the ball-drop error display.

  When the ball drop error notification is not performed, the ball drop error display image TG is not displayed in the scene shown in FIG. 62 (C), and the ball drop error notification sound is not output. In such a state, only the music is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. When the lever pulling is detected for 5 seconds and the stop flag is turned on, the subsequent winning sound and the big winning opening opening sound are not output. Therefore, when it is desired to clearly view the selected music or the moving image of the music, a specific operation such as lever pulling of 5 seconds may be performed. Further, if a specific operation such as lever pulling of 2 seconds is performed, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, so that the selected music and the moving image of the music can be clearly viewed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above embodiment, in the big hit game state, for example, the music selected by executing the processing of steps S90628, S90629 to S90631 shown in FIG. In addition, during the reproduction of the music and the moving image of the music, a predetermined effect such as a special winning opening winning effect shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening effect shown in FIG. 59 can be executed. Also, by executing the processing of steps S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52, that is, based on the detection of a specific action of the player, the stop flag is switched on and off, and the execution of the predetermined effect is performed. The presence / absence can be changed (see FIG. 53). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (B) and FIG. 62, when the stop flag is turned on during the ball drop error notification, that is, when the stop mode is changed to the execution mode at the time of stop (no execution of the predetermined effect), the ball drop error notification is made. Can be executed continuously. As described above, during the execution of the abnormality notification such as the ball drop error notification, the execution of the predetermined effect such as the special winning opening winning effect or the effect when the large winning opening is opened prevents the abnormal notification, and the effect of the abnormal notification decreases. Can be prevented. Further, since the stop flag is turned on and the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which execution of the predetermined effect is impossible, the specific effect is executed by executing the predetermined effect during execution of the specific effect such as reproduction of a music or a moving image of the music. Can be prevented, and the effect of the specific effect can be prevented from being reduced.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, for example, by executing the processing of steps S90628, S90629 to S90631 shown in FIG. In addition, while the music or the moving image of the music is being played, a predetermined effect such as a special winning opening winning effect shown in FIG. 58 or a special winning opening effect shown in FIG. 59 can be executed. Also, by executing the processing of steps S90414, S90415, and S90423 to S90426 shown in FIG. 52, the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag is switched, and whether or not the predetermined effect is performed, and the volume output of the predetermined effect The execution mode such as the level and the brightness level can be changed (see FIG. 53). Then, during the ball dropping error notification, for example, when the suppression flag is turned on, that is, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, the ball dropping error notification can be continuously executed. As described above, during the execution of the abnormality notification such as the ball drop error notification, the execution of the predetermined effect such as the special winning opening winning effect or the effect when the large winning opening is opened prevents the abnormal notification, and the effect of the abnormal notification decreases. Can be prevented. Further, for example, since the suppression flag is turned on and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, the specific effect is performed by executing the predetermined effect during execution of the specific effect such as reproduction of the music or the moving image of the music. Can be prevented, and the effect of the specific effect can be prevented from being reduced.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, it is determined in step S90622a shown in FIG. 54 that a big hit is in progress (step S90622a; Yes), and in step S90628, a short period of time for the player against the push button 9031B. By performing a predetermined operation such as a pressing operation (simple pressing), the image indicating the music title can be moved. Also, it is determined in step S90401 shown in FIG. 52 that it is a big hit (step S90401; Yes), and a specific operation such as an operation of continuously pulling the stick button controller 9031A of the player for 5 seconds is performed, and thus the process proceeds to step S90412. In step S90421, when it is determined that the timing result is 5 seconds or longer (step S90412; Yes), or when a specific operation such as an operation of continuously pulling the stick button controller 9031A of the player for 2 seconds is performed. When it is determined that the counted result is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (step S90421; Yes), the on / off state of the stop flag or the suppression flag can be switched, that is, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed. It is. As described above, since the player can perform the specific operation different from the predetermined operation, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the execution mode unintended, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Can be prevented.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, for example, the game is performed by the player within a period from two seconds before the big hit end specifying command is received until the big hit end specifying command is received. When the lever pulling operation is started, the timing result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation does not become 2 seconds or more, so that the ON / OFF state of the suppression flag is not switched, and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect and the setting of the predetermined effect (step S90424). The time measurement result is initialized without executing the processing of the normal setting of the predetermined effect (step S90426). Further, for example, when the lever pulling operation by the player is started within a period from 5 seconds before receiving the big hit end specifying command to when the big hit end specifying command is received and the lever pulling operation is continued, the lever pulling operation is performed. Since the timed result in the timed processing of the above does not exceed 5 seconds, the on / off state of the stop flag is not switched, and the timed result is initialized. Unless the on / off state of the suppression flag or the stop flag is switched, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed. As described above, the execution manner of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation such as the lever pulling operation by the player, so that the execution manner of the predetermined effect can be suitably changed.

  Note that, for example, when a player pulls a lever in a next round waiting period (interval period) from the end of a round game to the start of the next round game, the lever pulling operation may be invalidated. . For example, even when the lever pull operation by the player is started within the next round waiting period, the timing processing of the lever pull operation may not be performed, or the presence or absence of the lever pull operation may not be determined. . Thus, when the start timing of the specific operation such as the lever pulling operation by the player is within the next round waiting period, the execution mode of the predetermined effect may not be changed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, an effect of outputting a winning sound notifying that a gaming ball has been awarded to the special winning opening (a special winning opening winning effect), and the remaining number of winnings in a round game A plurality of predetermined effects, such as an effect of displaying the number of remaining prizes (a prize-winning prize-winning effect), and an effect of outputting a prize-winning-opening sound to notify that the prize-winning opening has been opened (an effect at the time of opening the special prize-winning opening). The execution mode of the plurality of predetermined effects is changed by switching the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. As a result, the effect can be improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, when a ball removal error display and a ball removal error notification sound are performed as shown in FIG. By pulling the 9031A continuously for 5 seconds, the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds) is detected, and the stop flag is turned on, the remaining winning number display ends as shown in FIG. Even if a winning in the winning opening occurs, a normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, while a ball-drop error display and a ball-drop error notification sound are continuously performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), when the ball-dropping error display and the ball-dropping error notification sound are being output, the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds, and the operation ( When the suppression flag is turned on by detecting the lever pulling (2 seconds), the remaining winning number display is changed to the suppression mode as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), and the winning in the large winning opening occurs. Also, while the normal winning sound (winning sound) is output in a suppressed mode, the ball-drop error display and the output of the ball-drop error notification sound are continuously performed. As described above, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed during the abnormality notification such as the ball drop error notification, or the predetermined effect execution mode is changed during the abnormality notification such as the ball drop error notification. When the mode is changed to the suppression mode, the easiness of recognizing the abnormality notification changes, so that the abnormality notification according to the change in the execution mode of the predetermined effect is possible, and it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 includes the music reproducing unit realized in cooperation with the voice control board 9013 and the like. In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that music to be reproduced in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot game state) can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 55C). Have been. The music reproducing means can reproduce the music in a specific period (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing step S90634 in FIG. 54), and when the music is selected, it is a part of the selected music and A specific portion different from the beginning of the music is reproduced (for example, effect control CPU 90120 executes step S90628 in FIG. 54). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the time of music selection.

  The big hit period of the big hit gaming state is a period in which the opening of the big winning port is repeated, that is, a round game period, but is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a period of a fanfare effect performed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating the attacker release (round game period), and an ending effect period executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state and that notifies that the big hit game state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state and that notifies the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the specific period is not limited to the period in the big hit gaming state, and how the period is determined is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super-reach production period. In this case, the song determination process shown in FIG. 54 is transformed into a process of determining a song before or during the super-reach period, and the determined song is processed in the transformed process, a process of controlling a reach effect, and the like. It may be reproduced at Further, the specific period may be a probable change state, a time reduction state, or the like.

  In addition, the specifying unit is not limited to the “rust” of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a portion other than “rust” (A melody or the like) may be used as the specifying portion. Further, the specifying unit may be a head of the music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and can solve at least one problem in the related art by using the one described in the above embodiment. It may have a configuration of a unit.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the specific operation detection process shown in FIG. 52, when there is no lever pull operation in step S90402 (step S90402; No), the timing result in the timing process of the lever pull operation is 5 seconds or more (lever pull). (Step S90412), or whether or not the timing result in the timing process of the lever pull operation is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (Step S90421) is performed, and Step S90412 is performed. Alternatively, in the case of Yes in step S90421, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed. In other words, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed at the timing when the lever is returned after the lever pulling operation is started and 2 seconds or more or 5 seconds or more has elapsed. However, even if the lever pulling operation is continued without returning the lever, the execution state of the predetermined effect may be changed at a timing when 2 or 5 seconds have elapsed after the lever pulling operation is started. For example, after the first vibration setting of the lever is performed in step S90405, the processing from step S90422 is performed, and after the second vibration setting of the lever is performed in step S90407, the processing after step S90413 is performed. May be. With this configuration, the lever pulling operation is started, and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed at a timing when 2 seconds or 5 seconds have elapsed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed when a specific operation such as a lever pull of 5 seconds or more or 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds is detected. During the detection of the player's specific action, for example, in the case where the timing result is less than 5 seconds or less than 2 seconds when it is determined in step S90402 that there is a lever pull operation, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is An execution mode of the predetermined effect after the change may be adopted. “During detection of a specific operation” refers to a period from the start of the specific operation to the detection of the specific operation. In the above embodiment, the presence or absence of the specific operation is detected at the timing when the lever pull operation is no longer detected. However, the presence or absence of the specific operation is detected at a timing when 2 or 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the lever pull operation. It may be detected. In this case, “during detection of a specific operation” is a period from the start of the specific operation to the lapse of 2 or 5 seconds. For example, if it is determined in step S90404 that the timing result is 2 seconds (step S90404; Yes), the processing in steps S90422 to S90426 is performed, and in step S90406, it is determined that the timing result is 5 seconds. In this case (step S90406; Yes), the processing of steps S90413 to S90415 may be executed.

  FIG. 63 shows an example of an effect such as a special winning opening sound or a ball-drop error display in a modification. In the example shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the song A is selected as the song during the big hit, as in the example shown in FIG. It is assumed that a moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) and MV (Music Video) of music A is reproduced. Also in the example shown in FIG. 63, the description will be made from the time when the stop flag is off and the suppression flag is off.

  For example, when the lower plate is full of game balls during the round game of the tenth round, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), a ball removal error is displayed. Is displayed in a normal size. In addition, a ball drop error notification sound is output. At this time, the beading error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 908L and 908R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound and the music is the normal level (third level). Note that the volume output level may have been changed in the volume status display processing in step S90161.

  Here, when the player starts the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A (lever pull), the remaining winning number display is changed to the suppression mode as shown in FIG. 63 (B). Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG is low. In this state, when a prize in the special winning opening occurs, the speaker 908L and 908R output a beeping error notification sound, a song, and a normal prize sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. That is, when the lever pull by the player is started, the execution mode of the predetermined effect becomes the suppression mode. Then, when the operation is completed (lever return) before two seconds have elapsed since the player started the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A, the remaining winning number display is in a normal mode as shown in FIG. 63 (C2). Is changed to Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG becomes a high level. In this state, when a prize in the special winning opening occurs, the speaker 908L and 908R output a beeping error notification sound, a song, and a normal prize sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the normal level. That is, if the lever is returned before two seconds elapse after the player starts pulling the lever, the execution mode of the predetermined effect returns to the same mode as before the lever pull was started. It should be noted that the state shown in FIG. 63 (B) may be used until 2 seconds elapse after the lever pull is started again after the execution state of the predetermined effect returns.

  Further, when two seconds elapse after the player starts the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A, the predetermined effect is set to be suppressed (step S90424 in the above embodiment), so that the execution of the predetermined effect is suppressed. 63, and the remaining winning number display is terminated (the winning number display image NG is erased) as shown in FIG. 63 (C1). In this state, when a prize in the special winning opening occurs, the speaker 908L and 908R output a beeping error notification sound and music, but do not output a normal prize sound (winning sound). In other words, when two seconds have elapsed after the player started pulling the lever, the execution of the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect is not executed (execution mode when stopped). Then, when the operation is terminated (lever return) before 5 seconds elapse after the player starts the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A, the remaining winning number display is suppressed as shown in FIG. 63 (D2). Started with Specifically, a winning number display image NG having a low brightness level is displayed. In this state, when a prize in the special winning opening occurs, the speaker 908L and 908R output a beeping error notification sound, a song, and a normal prize sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. That is, if the lever is returned two seconds after the start of the lever pull by the player and before the lapse of five seconds, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is suppressed (the two seconds elapse after the lever pull is started). (The same mode as the later suppression mode). Note that the state shown in FIG. 63 (C1) may be used until the lever pull is started again and 3 seconds or 5 seconds elapse after the execution mode of the predetermined effect returns to the suppression mode.

  In addition, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the player started the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A, the stop flag is turned on, so that the execution of the predetermined effect is not performed (execution at stop). Mode). As described above, during the detection of the specific action such as the lever pulling of 5 seconds or 2 seconds, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the execution mode of the predetermined effect scheduled to be changed based on the detection of the specific operation. It may be. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, the execution mode of the predetermined effect may not include the suppression mode. In this case, when the player starts the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A (lever pull) in the scene shown in FIG. 63A, the remaining winning number display ends as shown in FIG. 63C1 (the winning number). The display image NG may be deleted). In addition, a mode in which the predetermined effect is not executed may not be provided as the execution mode of the predetermined effect. In this case, when two seconds elapse after the player starts the operation of pulling the stick button controller 9031A, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed, so that the execution mode of the predetermined effect is definitely changed to the suppression mode. It should be done.

  Further, the image display device 905 may be able to display a control history to a big hit gaming state, such as a continuous chan history, for example. When the special map display result is “big hit”, a case where the big hit type is any of “15 rounds (15R)” and “5 rounds (5R)” may be included. For example, a plurality of jackpot types having different degrees of advantage for the player, such as “non-probable (15R)”, “non-probable (5R)”, “probable (15R)”, and “probable (5R)”, are set. It may be. As an example, in the consecutive chan, the first control history is displayed as a control history indicating that the control has been performed to the big hit game state of the big hit type “probable (15R)”, and the big hit game of the big hit type “probable (5R)” The second control history is displayed as a control history indicating that the state has been controlled, and it is confirmed that the game has been controlled to the big hit game state of the other big hit types (“non-probable change (15R)” and “non-probable change (5R)”). A third control history may be displayed as the control history to be displayed. In addition, a control history indicating that the control has been performed in the jackpot game state of other jackpot types may be individually displayed according to the jackpot type. As the control history, by displaying the same number of history images as the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state, the number of times of control to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the history image may be indicated. The number of times of control to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the history image may be indicated by displaying a combination of a number image and a number image indicating the number of times of control.

  Further, for example, a special operation of the player such as a pressing operation of the player on a trigger button provided on the operation stick of the stick button controller 9031A may be detected. Then, the display mode of the control history to the big hit gaming state may be switchable based on the detection of the player's special action.

  FIG. 64 shows an example of switching the display mode of the control history to the big hit gaming state in the modification. As shown in FIG. 64 (A), for example, three first history images RG1 are displayed as first control histories which are control histories indicating that the game has been controlled to the big hit game state of the big hit type “probable (15R)”. ing. This indicates that the control has been performed three times to the jackpot game state of the jackpot type “probable change (15R)” during the consecutive Chang. For example, seven second history images RG2 are displayed as second control histories that are control histories indicating that the game has been controlled to the big hit game state of the big hit type “probable change (5R)”. This indicates that the control has been performed seven times to the jackpot game state of the jackpot type “probable change (5R)” during the consecutive chan. Although not shown, when the third control history, which is a control history indicating that the game has been controlled to the big hit game state of the big hit type “non-probable change (15R)” or “non-probable change (5R)”, is displayed, The same number of third history images as the number of times controlled in the jackpot game state of the jackpot type “non-probable change (15R)” or “non-probable change (5R)” is displayed.

  Here, when a special operation of the player such as a pressing operation of the player on the trigger button provided on the operation stick of the stick button controller 9031A is detected, as shown in FIG. 64B, the control history to the big hit gaming state is displayed. The display mode switches. Specifically, three first history images RG1 displayed as the first control history are obtained by combining one first history image RG1, a multiplied image indicating "x", and a numerical image indicating "3". Switch to the image. Further, the seven second history images RG2 displayed as the second control history are switched to an image obtained by combining one second history image RG2, a multiplied image indicating “x”, and a numeric image indicating “7”. . By detecting a special action of the player in this manner, the first display mode, which is the display mode of the control history to the big hit gaming state shown in FIG. 64A, is changed from the first display mode shown in FIG. Is switched to the second display mode, which is the display mode of the control history.

  Further, when the special action of the player is detected, the display mode of the control history to the big hit gaming state is switched as shown in FIG. Specifically, an image obtained by combining one first history image RG1 displayed as the first control history, a multiplied image indicating “x”, and a numerical image indicating “3” is included in three first history images. Switch to RG1. Further, an image obtained by combining one second history image RG2 displayed as the second control history with the multiplied image indicating “x” and the numeral image indicating “7” is switched to seven second history images RG2. . By detecting the special action of the player in this way, the big hit game state shown in FIG. 64C is changed from the second display mode which is the display mode of the control history to the big hit game state shown in FIG. Is switched to the first display mode, which is the display mode of the control history. The display mode of the control history to the big hit gaming state in the initial state may be the first display mode shown in FIG. 64 (C) or the second display mode shown in FIG. 64 (B). .

  As described above, the control history can be switched to the jackpot game state based on the detection of the special action of the player, so that the control history can be displayed in a display mode according to the preference of the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64, the special operation is a pressing operation on the trigger button provided on the operation stick of the stick button controller 9031A. However, the special operation is, for example, a pressing operation on the push button 9031B for a short period (simple pressing). ), Or a push operation (long press) for a long period of time (for example, one second) on the push button 9031B, or the stick button controller 9031A is kept in front of the push button 9031B for a predetermined time. It may be a specific operation such as prolonged pulling. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the control history to the big hit gaming state is displayed during the variable display, but the control history to the big hit gaming state may be displayed during the big hit gaming state or the demonstration display.

  In the above embodiment, the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds during the ball-throwing error notification (during the error notification) such as the ball-throwing error display and the output of the ball-throwing error notification sound, and the operation (lever) is performed. (5 seconds) and when the stop flag is turned on and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect is not executable, the ball drop error notification can be continuously executed. I did it. In addition, during notification of a ball dropping error, the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds, detects the operation (lever pulling 2 seconds), and turns on the suppression flag, thereby executing the predetermined effect. When the mode is changed to the suppression mode, the ball drop error notification can be continuously executed. Note that the abnormality notification is not limited to the above-described ball-drop error notification. The abnormal notification is a special winning opening abnormal winning notification executed when an abnormal winning occurs in the special winning opening, a starting winning opening abnormal winning notification executed when an abnormal winning occurs in the second starting winning opening, A special winning opening input / output mismatch notification executed when the input / output of the game ball to the special winning opening does not match, or another abnormal notification may be performed. Note that, among the abnormality notifications, the ball-drop error notification has a lower importance than other abnormality notifications. Therefore, when the ball drop error notification is performed, the display size of the ball drop error display and the volume output level of the ball drop error notification sound may be changed according to the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. However, when performing the abnormality notification with high importance, the display size of the error display is set to a predetermined size (such as the maximum size or the normal size) regardless of the on / off state of the stop flag or the suppression flag, The volume output level of the error notification sound may be set to a predetermined level (such as a maximum level or a normal level).

  In the above embodiment, when the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds, detects the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds) and turns the stop flag on, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed. 53, the mode in which the predetermined effect is executable (normal execution mode) is changed to the mode in which the predetermined effect is not executable (execution mode at stop). Specifically, the stop flag is turned on, the production of a winning sound that informs that a game ball has won in the big winning opening, the remaining winning number display indicating the remaining winning number in the round game. All of a plurality of predetermined effects, such as an effect to be performed and an effect to output a special winning opening opening sound for notifying that the special winning opening has been opened, are changed to a mode that cannot be simultaneously executed. Further, when the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds and detects the operation (lever pulling 2 seconds) and the suppression flag is turned on, the execution state of the predetermined effect is shown in FIG. The predetermined effect shown is changed from an executable mode (normal execution mode) to a suppression mode (execution mode during suppression). Specifically, the suppression flag is turned on, the production of a winning sound that informs that the game ball has won the big winning opening, the remaining winning number display indicating the remaining winning number in the round game. All of a plurality of predetermined effects such as an effect to be performed and an effect to output a special winning opening opening sound for notifying that the special winning opening is opened are simultaneously suppressed (a volume output level is a minimum level and a brightness level is a low level). Was changed to

  However, when the stop flag or the suppression flag is turned on, it may be possible to individually set, for example, on a menu screen, which one of the plurality of predetermined effects is not executable or the suppression mode. The menu screen may be displayed on the image display device 905 based on, for example, detecting a menu screen display operation by the player during the demonstration display. Then, when the menu screen is displayed, the execution mode of each predetermined effect when the specific operation is performed may be set by the execution mode setting operation by the player. As an example, an effect of outputting a prize sound when the stop flag is turned on by detecting a specific operation in which the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 5 seconds by the execution mode setting operation by the player, and winning. The effect of displaying numbers may be set to be unexecutable, while the effect of outputting a special winning opening sound may be set to be executable. Further, the execution mode setting operation performed by the player detects a specific operation in which the player continuously pulls the stick button controller 9031A for 2 seconds, and outputs a prize sound when the suppression flag is turned on. While the effect of performing the display is set to the suppression mode in which the effect is suppressed, the effect of outputting the special winning opening sound may be set to be executable or non-executable.

  In the execution mode at the time of suppression (suppression mode), as shown in FIG. 53, the volume output levels of the winning sound and the winning opening sound are the lowest level (for example, the lowest level and the lowest level among the first to fifth levels). Level) and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to a low level. However, the volume output level of the winning sound and the grand opening opening sound in the suppression mode is not limited to the lowest level, and may be another level. Further, the brightness level of the remaining winning number display in the suppression mode is not limited to the low level, but may be another level.

  Further, the volume output level of the winning sound and the grand opening opening sound and the brightness level of the remaining winning number display in the execution mode (suppression mode) at the time of suppression shown in FIG. 53 can be individually set on a menu screen, for example. Is also good. When the menu screen is displayed, the suppression mode for each predetermined effect may be set by the suppression mode setting operation by the player. As an example, the volume output level of the winning sound and the grand opening opening sound in the suppression mode is set to the second level by the player in the suppression mode setting operation by the player, while the brightness level of the remaining winning number display is set to the low level. May be set. Similarly, the volume output level for the winning sound and the grand opening opening sound and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display in the normal execution mode shown in FIG. 53 may be individually set on the menu screen. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, when an over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect relating to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is performed. When the ending effect is over (when there is no hold, when the ending effect ends), an information effect relating to the over prize may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed, but in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 905, or Alternatively, a brightness status display image indicating the adjustment status of the brightness adjustment for the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909 or the decoration LED may be displayed. Further, only the luminance status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the volume status display process (step S90161) shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 may be changed to a process that enables display of the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image. Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, a mode status display image indicating a mode status indicating the execution frequency of an effect such as a notice of a pending change may be displayed. Further, a mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the volume status display image VL is erased and cannot be visually recognized. However, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize. . For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a translucent display mode, a very small and reduced display mode (a minute display mode), or the like. Further, it may be notified that the volume adjustment is always possible. For example, the fact that volume adjustment is always possible may be notified by telop display. Further, the fact that the volume adjustment is always possible may be notified by the explanation effect display. The execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, and may be performed in a customer waiting state (so-called customer waiting), a big hit game state, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 905 unless there is a request from the player. However, in the big hit game state, there is no request from the player. The volume status display image VL may not be displayed as long as it is displayed. In this case, the sound volume status display processing shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 may be modified to be executable during a big hit. For example, in place of the process of determining whether or not a super reach effect is being performed in the volume status display process, a process of determining whether or not a large hit effect is being performed, or each operation flag or the like is transformed into an operation flag conforming to a big hit. As a result, the sound volume state display processing can be executed during the big hit. When the ending effect display is performed, the volume status display image VL may be displayed on the image display device 905 also during the ending effect period. According to such a modification, for example, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL (display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment) according to the player's request while suppressing the effect of the effect during the big hit. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the detection control based on the music selection during the big hit may be prioritized over the adjustment state detection control. In other words, the effect adjustment (for example, status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, and mode switching) may not be possible during music selection. This is particularly effective when the same operation means (for example, a cross button or the like) performs an operation for selecting a music and an operation for effect adjustment.

  In the above embodiment, there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection (for example, when a predetermined music determination operation is performed, or when the special winning opening is closed in the first round, step S90631 in FIG. 54 is performed. Is used to determine the currently selected song). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music.

  In addition, since there are a plurality of types of music determination operations, there may be a plurality of music determination methods. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations that can detect the operation content according to the player's operation using a noncontact sensor such as a stick button controller 9031A, a push button 9031B, or an infrared sensor. Also, the present invention is not limited to the example in which the selected song is determined when the special winning opening is closed in the first round, and the music is determined according to the fact that the special winning opening is closed in any round other than the first round. Or the music may be determined according to the end of the first hit. In addition, the method of determining the music may be one.

  In the above-described embodiment, music can be selected in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, during the execution of the first round in the big hit game state). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music.

  Note that the advantageous state may be during execution of a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the big hit gaming state. For example, a special state such as a probability change state may be set as an advantageous state, or a first round number (for example, “7”) in which the maximum number of executable rounds among a plurality of jackpot gaming states is larger than a second round number (for example, “7”). For example, the big hit game state of “15”) may be set as the advantageous state. Alternatively, a time-saving state in which the upper limit number of variable display that can be executed among a plurality of time-saving states becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than a second number (for example, “50”) may be set as the advantageous state. Alternatively, a probable state in which the jackpot probability becomes a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) among a plurality of probable states may be set as an advantageous state. In addition, any game state that is advantageous to the player may be set to an advantageous state. In addition, music selection may be possible in a state other than the advantageous state.

  In the above embodiment, at the time of music selection, a display means for displaying an image corresponding to the music reproduced in the specific period and corresponding to the specific part (for example, the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 56B) Image display device 905 for displaying a music-corresponding image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effect at the time of music selection.

  Note that the image (song corresponding image) corresponding to the specifying unit may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Also, the music corresponding image need not be displayed when the music is selected.

In the above embodiment, the storage means for storing one music as a plurality of divided audio data including the specific part data indicating the sound of the specific part (for example, as shown in FIG. ROM90121 for storing a plurality of audio data including
The music reproduction means reproduces a specific part of one music based on the specific part data at the time of music selection (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S90628 of FIG. 54), and a plurality of music reproduction parts during the specific period. A piece of music is reproduced by connecting the divided audio data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S90634 in FIG. 54). According to such a configuration, the load on the data capacity can be reduced.

  As described above, the music-corresponding image data may also be stored in the ROM 90121 or the like in a manner divided into individual music parts (each as separate image data), similarly to the audio data of the music. In this case, the load on the data capacity can be further reduced. Further, both the audio data indicating one music piece and the image data corresponding to the music piece need not be stored in a divided form.

  Further, according to the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) described above, in the gaming state (first state) other than the super reach effect, the presence / absence of operation of the stick button controller 9031A by the player (operation of the player) Regardless of this, since the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is displayed on the image display device 905 so as to be visible, the volume status display image VL can always be visually recognized in a gaming state other than the super reach effect. Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super-reach effect in which the super-reach effect is executed, the volume status display image VL is made invisible, and when the player operates the stick button controller 9031A, the game is executed. The volume status display image VL is displayed based on the operation of the stick button controller 9031A by the user until a predetermined period elapses after the operation (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). That is, in the gaming state during the super-reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. This makes it possible to display the sound volume status display image VL in response to a request from the player while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the super reach effect is an effect that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL in accordance with the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super-reach effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), since the sound volume status display image VL is displayed at a position where it does not cover the decorative symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the game result is visually recognized. The sound volume can be adjusted without disturbing the sound.

  In the gaming state (second state) during the super-reach effect, the volume status display image VL is provided only for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of display of the volume status display image VL) after the operation of the stick button controller 9031A is detected by the player. Is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. This makes it possible to display the sound volume status display image VL in response to a request from the player while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the above description, the first state is a game state other than during the super-reach effect, but before the super-reach effect is executed (before starting) or after the super-reach effect is executed (after the end). Any of the states may be adopted. In addition, the first state may be at least one of a period before execution of a super reach effect in one change (before start) or a period after execution of a super reach effect in one change (after end). The second state may be a state during a period in which a super-reach effect in one change is performed. In addition, the second state may be a special state that easily becomes an advantageous state such as a big hit game state. This special state is a probable change state or a time saving state. In addition, the special state is a state in which the game ball is frequently changed (or may not pass or enter) in the variable winning prize ball device 906B from the first mode in which it is difficult or difficult to change to the second mode in which it is easy to win. There may be.

  In addition, before shifting from the game state other than the super reach effect (first state) to the game state during the super reach effect (second state), the player responds to the operation of the stick button controller 9031A (the operation of the player). When the display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state shifts from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach effect is being performed, If the period (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended until a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection or transition of the player's operation, so that the display of the volume status display image VL is performed. The display can be extended for a predetermined period of time even after the super reach effect has been produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for the volume adjustment started immediately before the start of the super reach effect from ending halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased halfway. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity of being performed. Further, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick button controller 9031A again immediately after the super reach effect is started, so that a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  Conversely, the player operates the stick button controller 9031A (the player) before shifting from the gaming state during the super-reach effect (the second state) to the game state other than the super-reach effect (the first state). ), The display of the volume state display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect ends. If the game state is changed to a state other than the super reach effect but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed after the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued even after the transition to the first state. The process of deleting the display of the volume status display image VL after the lapse of the predetermined period can be eliminated. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing of once deleting the volume status display image VL after a predetermined period has elapsed and restarting the display. In addition, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling that the display of the volume status display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the gaming machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 having a function of variably displaying a special symbol and a decorative symbol and a function of displaying various effect images has been described. However, at least a part of the configuration and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the above embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  In the slot machine, when the gaming state has shifted to a special gaming state such as a regular bonus or a big bonus, the player can acquire more medals than the normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the regular gaming state. It becomes a game state. Note that the special game state is not limited to the regular bonus or the big bonus, and the player can be expected to acquire more medals than the normal game state, and the special game state is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state. I just need. As a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, for example, an operation that satisfies the reel-out condition (for example, stop order and stop timing) that satisfies the notification target prize derivation condition By controlling the assist time (AT) at which the procedure is notified and the drawing-in range of at least one of the reels, the symbols displayed are controlled so that the symbols displayed when the stop switch is operated are easily stopped. Time (CT) that allows the player to derive a combination of winning symbols by pushing the eye, a challenge bonus (CB) with a continuous challenge time, a specific winning (for example, a replay winning or a single bonus winning). Game state (so-called replay time (RT) or concentration state) in which the probability of occurrence of It may be at such a gaming state in which a combination of these.

  The effects that can be executed in such a slot machine may include a specific effect such as the music in the above-described embodiment and a moving image of the music, a predetermined effect executed during the special game state, and the like. It is only necessary that the slot machine can execute the abnormality notification. Further, in the slot machine, it is only necessary that the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed based on the detection of the specific operation.

  In the above embodiment, the “proportion” or “probability” at which various determinations are made is 0% (not determined) or 100% (necessarily determined), such as 70:30. May be set so as not to be determined, or at least the possibility of one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case where various decisions are made, the ratio of one decision result is higher than the ratio of one decision result among the plurality of decision results. 100% may be included, or the ratio of another determination result may be 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the other decision result is 0%, if the ratio of the one decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% other than 100%, the ratio of the one decision result is the other decision result. Higher than the ratio.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs during the variable display of the special symbol. Repeatedly turns on and off, and the other LEDs maintain the off state. Then, when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state in which the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or by maintaining the state in which the light is turned off, Stop and display the special symbol. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the plurality of LEDs are turned on. As described above, during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, the specific (single) symbol is switched between the display and the non-display, while the other symbols are kept in the non-display state. Good. Then, as a final stop symbol (fixed special symbol or fixed decorative symbol) which is a variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be displayed (stop-displayed). In addition, for example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are configured using 7-segment LEDs, and during the variable display of the special symbol, display (lighting) of a symbol indicating “-” is performed. Non-display (extinguishment) may be repeated so that other numbers and symbols are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of the special symbol, the symbol indicating "-" is not stopped and displayed, and a predetermined lighting pattern including a number indicating "1" to "9" and other symbols is used. By doing so, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, the symbol that is not stopped and displayed as the variable display result is switched between the display and the non-display, while the other symbols are kept in the non-display state. You may.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the process of step S90242 shown in FIG. 43 includes “probable change”, and based on the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is “probable change”, It has been described that the state is established, and after the big hitting game state is ended, the state is controlled to the positive change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that has won (entered) the big winning opening (second big winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area is detected by the probability changing detection switch. And the game state after the end of the big hit game state may be controlled to the positive change state. The winning port (second winning port) of the probability change attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is a predetermined number (for example, “15”). When the number of executions of the game is other than the predetermined number of times, the game may not be changed to the open state in the closed state. In this manner, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the certainty control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the attacker which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. It may be configured to be as follows.

  In the above embodiment, one variable pattern designation command is transmitted when starting variable display in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a variable pattern indicating a variable display time, a variable display mode of a decorative symbol, and the like. Although the example has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 changes the variable before the reach by the first command (or before the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached). A command indicating a display time or a variable display mode is transmitted, and the second command is used to display the type of reach, the variable display time after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop, if the reach is not reached), and the variable A command indicating the display mode may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 9012, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of the two commands. The microcomputer 90100 for game control notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the CPU 90120 for effect control selects a specific variable display mode executed at each timing. It may be. When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, or after a predetermined period has elapsed after transmitting the first command (for example, in the next timer interrupt). ) A second command may be transmitted. Note that the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands in this manner, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as a game machine is described. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes. The present invention can also be applied to a sealed-type gaming machine in which a score is given when a condition for giving a prize is satisfied by enclosing a game medium such as.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the rendering image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 deviate from the gist of the present invention. Any change and modification can be made without departing from the scope. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by a detachable recording medium, but may be a computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the server. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by executing a program and data downloaded via a communication line by temporarily storing the program and data in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Ordinary prize ball device 6B Ordinary variable prize ball device 7 Special variable prize ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Gaming effect lamp 11 Main Board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Starting port switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 Effect control CPU
123 display control unit 901 pachinko gaming machine 905 image display device 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 908L, 908R speaker 9031A stick controller 9031B push button 90100 game control microcomputer 90120 effect control CPU
90123 Display control unit VL Volume status display image NG Remaining winning number display image TG Ball-off error display image RG1, RG2 History image

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage;
Special notification execution means capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the specific effect,
Changing means for changing whether or not the predetermined effect is performed;
Abnormality notification execution means capable of executing abnormality notification;
Corresponding display means for performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
Correspondence display changing means for changing a display mode of the correspondence display,
The abnormality notification execution means, when the presence or absence of the execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification, it is possible to continuously execute the abnormality notification,
The specific display means, stepwise increase or decrease the meter display of the display mode as the specific display when said specific display of the display mode is changed has passed a predetermined time period after the notification,
The special notification executing unit is also capable of executing the special notification in a predetermined period subsequent to said certain display of the display mode is changed is notified,
A gaming machine, wherein a ratio controlled in the advantageous state is different depending on a combination of a display mode of the correspondence display and a display mode of the meter display . A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A specific display means for performing a specific display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage;
Special notification execution means capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Specific effect execution means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during execution of the specific effect,
Changing means capable of changing the execution mode of the predetermined effect,
Abnormality notification execution means capable of executing abnormality notification;
Corresponding display means for performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
Correspondence display changing means for changing a display mode of the corresponding display,
The abnormality notification execution unit, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change unit during the abnormality notification, can continuously execute the abnormality notification,
The specific display means, stepwise increase or decrease the meter display of the display mode as the specific display when said specific display of the display mode is changed has passed a predetermined time period after the notification,
The special notification executing unit is also capable of executing the special notification in a predetermined period subsequent to said certain display of the display mode is changed is notified,
A gaming machine, wherein a ratio controlled in the advantageous state is different depending on a combination of a display mode of the correspondence display and a display mode of the meter display .